WO2017086245A1 - Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, image display device and dye polymer - Google Patents
Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, image display device and dye polymer Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- WO2017086245A1 WO2017086245A1 PCT/JP2016/083490 JP2016083490W WO2017086245A1 WO 2017086245 A1 WO2017086245 A1 WO 2017086245A1 JP 2016083490 W JP2016083490 W JP 2016083490W WO 2017086245 A1 WO2017086245 A1 WO 2017086245A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- group
- dye
- formula
- compound
- substituent
- Prior art date
Links
- 0 *c1nnc(*)[n]1* Chemical compound *c1nnc(*)[n]1* 0.000 description 10
- XDTMQSROBMDMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N C1CCCCC1 Chemical compound C1CCCCC1 XDTMQSROBMDMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2/00—Processes of polymerisation
- C08F2/44—Polymerisation in the presence of compounding ingredients, e.g. plasticisers, dyestuffs, fillers
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F2/00—Processes of polymerisation
- C08F2/46—Polymerisation initiated by wave energy or particle radiation
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F257/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of aromatic monomers as defined in group C08F12/00
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C08—ORGANIC MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS; THEIR PREPARATION OR CHEMICAL WORKING-UP; COMPOSITIONS BASED THEREON
- C08F—MACROMOLECULAR COMPOUNDS OBTAINED BY REACTIONS ONLY INVOLVING CARBON-TO-CARBON UNSATURATED BONDS
- C08F265/00—Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00
- C08F265/04—Macromolecular compounds obtained by polymerising monomers on to polymers of unsaturated monocarboxylic acids or derivatives thereof as defined in group C08F20/00 on to polymers of esters
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C09—DYES; PAINTS; POLISHES; NATURAL RESINS; ADHESIVES; COMPOSITIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR; APPLICATIONS OF MATERIALS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- C09B—ORGANIC DYES OR CLOSELY-RELATED COMPOUNDS FOR PRODUCING DYES, e.g. PIGMENTS; MORDANTS; LAKES
- C09B69/00—Dyes not provided for by a single group of this subclass
- C09B69/10—Polymeric dyes; Reaction products of dyes with monomers or with macromolecular compounds
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B5/00—Optical elements other than lenses
- G02B5/20—Filters
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/027—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
- G03F7/028—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with photosensitivity-increasing substances, e.g. photoinitiators
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/004—Photosensitive materials
- G03F7/027—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds
- G03F7/032—Non-macromolecular photopolymerisable compounds having carbon-to-carbon double bonds, e.g. ethylenic compounds with binders
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/20—Exposure; Apparatus therefor
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03F—PHOTOMECHANICAL PRODUCTION OF TEXTURED OR PATTERNED SURFACES, e.g. FOR PRINTING, FOR PROCESSING OF SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; MATERIALS THEREFOR; ORIGINALS THEREFOR; APPARATUS SPECIALLY ADAPTED THEREFOR
- G03F7/00—Photomechanical, e.g. photolithographic, production of textured or patterned surfaces, e.g. printing surfaces; Materials therefor, e.g. comprising photoresists; Apparatus specially adapted therefor
- G03F7/26—Processing photosensitive materials; Apparatus therefor
- G03F7/40—Treatment after imagewise removal, e.g. baking
Definitions
- the present invention relates to a coloring composition.
- the present invention relates to a color filter, a pattern forming method, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a dye multimer using a colored composition.
- CCD charge-coupled device
- Patent Documents 1 to 5 have yellow structures having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom. It describes that a color filter or the like is produced using a dye. Patent Document 6 describes that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing a dye multimer.
- an object of the present invention is to provide a colored composition, a color filter, a pattern forming method, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a dye multimer capable of producing a cured film in which the occurrence of color unevenness and defects is suppressed. It is in.
- a coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound,
- the dye multimer includes a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom.
- Y a represents a sulfur atom or —NR Ya —
- Y b represents a nitrogen atom or —CR Yb —
- R a , R b , R Ya and R Yb each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a substituent, a dye It represents the bonding site with the atomic group constituting the structure or the bonding site with the atomic group constituting the dye multimer
- R a and R Ya , R b and R Ya , and R b and R Yb are respectively They may combine to form a ring; any of the atoms that make up the ring, or the entire ring has a monovalent positive charge.
- R 1 and R 8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- R 2 , R 7 , R 9 to R 12 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
- Y 1 represents a sulfur atom or —NR Y1 —
- R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- X represents an anion
- R 1 At least one of -R 2 , R 7 -R 12 , R Y1 and X has a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
- R 101 , R 110 and R 111 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and R 102 to R 105 , R 106 to R 109 are Each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent, R 110 and R 111 may be bonded to form a ring, Y 2 represents a sulfur atom or —NR Y2 —, and R Y2 represents a hydrogen atom; , X represents an anion, and at least one of R 101 to R 109 , R Y2 and X has a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
- the dye multimer includes at least one of a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A) and a repeating unit represented by the following formula (C), or represented by the following formula (D).
- a 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
- DyeI contains two or more heteroatoms
- one or more of the heteroatoms are Represents a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle which is a nitrogen atom
- L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
- DyeIII is bonded to a cationic heterocyclic ring containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom.
- L 4 represents an (n + k) -valent linking group, n represents an integer of 2 to 20, k represents an integer of 0 to 20, DyeIV contains 2 or more heteroatoms,
- the plurality of DyeIVs may be different from each other.
- n + k represents an integer of 2 to 20.
- the dye multimer has a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion.
- ⁇ 8> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 7>, further containing a pigment.
- the curable compound contains a radical polymerizable compound and further contains a photopolymerization initiator.
- ⁇ 10> The colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 9>, further comprising an alkali-soluble resin.
- ⁇ 11> A color filter using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>.
- ⁇ 12> A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of ⁇ 1> to ⁇ 10>, and a photolithography method or a dry etching method to form a colored composition layer. Forming a pattern with respect to the pattern.
- ⁇ 13> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to ⁇ 11>.
- ⁇ 14> An image display device having the color filter according to ⁇ 11>.
- R 1 and R 8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- R 2 , R 7 , R 9 to R 12 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
- Y 1 represents a sulfur atom or —NR Y1 —
- R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- X represents an anion
- R 1 At least one of -R 2 , R 7 -R 12 , R Y1 and X has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer
- R 101 , R 110 and R 111 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- R 102 to R 105 R
- a colored composition a color filter, a pattern forming method, a solid-state imaging device, an image display device, and a dye multimer capable of producing a cured film in which occurrence of color unevenness and defects is suppressed. Became.
- the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what does not have a substituent and what has a substituent.
- the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
- light means actinic rays or radiation.
- Actinic light or “radiation” means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
- exposure means not only exposure with far ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also drawing with electron beams, ion beams, etc. unless otherwise specified. Include in exposure.
- a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
- the total solid content refers to the total mass of components obtained by removing the solvent from all components of the colored composition.
- “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate
- “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acrylic and “(meth) acrylic”.
- Allyl represents both and / or allyl and methallyl
- “(meth) acryloyl” represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
- the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
- a weight average molecular weight (Mw) and a number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement.
- the colored composition of the present invention is a colored composition containing a dye multimer and a curable compound, wherein the dye multimer contains two or more heteroatoms, and one or more of the heteroatoms are nitrogen atoms.
- a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a certain cationic heterocycle is included.
- a dye compound having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom is highly polar. Many.
- a dye compound having an asymmetric five-membered ring structure as a cationic heterocycle has a very high polarity as compared with xanthene, triarylmethane, cyanine and the like having high symmetry.
- many of the curable compounds used in the colored composition have a low polarity. For this reason, it is considered that such a highly polar dye compound is hardly compatible with other components in the coloring composition such as a curable compound.
- phase separation or the like occurs due to the interaction of dipoles, or the dye compound aggregates due to dipole interaction. It is presumed that defects, color unevenness, etc.
- a dye having a dye structure having the above-described cationic heterocycle is obtained by multimerizing a dye compound having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to the above-described cationic heterocycle. It is presumed that the migration of the dye multimer in the film could be suppressed by using the multimer. Furthermore, since the molecular weight is increased by using the dye multimer, it is presumed that the polarity becomes smaller than that of a single-molecule dye compound, and the compatibility with other components in the film is less likely to be lowered. .
- the coloring composition is applied to a support or the like, and after the dried film (uncured film) is left for a long time and then cured, phase separation or Aggregation can be suppressed, and as a result, it is presumed that a cured film in which color unevenness and defects are suppressed can be produced. Furthermore, since phase separation and aggregation at the time of holding can be suppressed, the film can be uniformly cured even after holding. Therefore, even if a pattern is formed after leaving the above-mentioned uncured film for a long time, it is possible to obtain a pattern in which color unevenness, defects and pattern surface roughness are small and pattern defects are suppressed.
- the coloring composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
- the coloring composition of the present invention has a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom.
- a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom.
- the dye multimer includes structures such as a dimer, a trimer and a polymer.
- the cation on the dye structure may be delocalized.
- the cationic heterocycle in the present invention includes a state where a cation is delocalized.
- the dye multimer of the present invention has two or more of the above dye structures in one molecule, and preferably has three or more.
- the upper limit is not particularly limited, but can be 100 or less.
- the dye structures in one molecule may be the same dye structure or different dye structures.
- different dye structures include not only dye structures having different dye skeletons but also dye structures having the same dye skeleton and different types of substituents bonded to the dye skeleton.
- the cationic heterocycle is preferably represented by the following formula (I).
- Y a represents a sulfur atom or —NR Ya —
- Y b represents a nitrogen atom or —CR Yb —
- R a , R b , R Ya and R Yb each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a substituent, a dye It represents the bonding site with the atomic group constituting the structure or the bonding site with the atomic group constituting the dye multimer, and R a and R Ya , R b and R Ya , and R b and R Yb are respectively They may combine to form a ring; any of the atoms that make up the ring, or the entire ring has a monovalent positive charge.
- Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples thereof include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
- the ring formed by combining R a and R Ya , R b and R Ya , and R b and R Yb may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
- the ring is preferably an aromatic ring.
- Examples of the aromatic ring include a hydrocarbon aromatic ring and a heteroaromatic ring. Examples of the hydrocarbon aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, and a phenanthrene ring.
- Heteroaromatic rings include pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrrole ring, quinoline ring, quinoxaline ring, furan ring, benzofuran ring, thiophene ring, benzothiophene ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, indole ring, And a carbazole ring.
- the aromatic ring is preferably a hydrocarbon aromatic ring, and more preferably a benzene ring.
- R a1 to R a23 each independently represent a bonding site with a hydrogen atom, a substituent, an atomic group constituting a dye structure, or a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
- substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples thereof include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
- Examples of the azo group bonded to the cationic heterocycle include a group represented by —N ⁇ N—R.
- R represents a substituent.
- Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later. For example, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group and an amino group are preferable.
- Examples of the aromatic ring group bonded to the cationic heterocycle include a hydrocarbon aromatic ring group and a heteroaromatic ring group.
- Examples of the hydrocarbon aromatic ring group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, and a phenanthrene ring group.
- Heteroaromatic ring groups include pyridine ring group, pyrazine ring group, pyrrole ring group, quinoline ring group, quinoxaline ring group, furan ring group, benzofuran ring group, thiophene ring group, benzothiophene ring group, oxazole ring group, thiazole Examples thereof include a ring group, an imidazole ring group, a pyrazole ring group, an indole ring group, and a carbazole ring group.
- the aromatic ring group is preferably a hydrocarbon aromatic ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
- the aromatic ring group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
- substituent examples include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- An electron donating group is preferred.
- the electron donating group include groups having a Hammett ⁇ p value of 0.2 or less. The ⁇ p value is preferably 0.1 or less, more preferably 0 or less.
- Specific examples of the electron donating group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, a urea group, an allyl group, and a hydroxyl group, and an amino group is preferable.
- These groups are substituted with substituents such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, thiol groups, thioalkoxy groups, amino groups, halogen atoms and the like within a range not losing electron donating properties. It may be. Further, these substituents may be further substituted with these substituents, and if possible, may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
- substituents such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, thiol groups, thioalkoxy groups, amino groups, halogen atoms and the like within a range not losing electron donating properties. It may be. Further, these substituents may be further substituted with these substituents, and if possible, may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
- the dye structure is preferably a dye structure represented by the formula (Ia).
- Ht represents a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms, and one or more of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom, L represents a single bond, —N ⁇ N—, or an arylene group;
- examples of the cationic heterocycle represented by Ht include the cationic heterocycles represented by the above formula (I), and the cationic heterocycles represented by the above formulas (1) to (6) Is preferred.
- L represents —N ⁇ N— or an arylene group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, more preferably 6 to 20, and particularly preferably 6 to 10.
- the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- B represents a substituent.
- substituents include those mentioned in Substituent Group A described later, and an aryl group, a heterocyclic group and an amino group are preferred.
- L represents an arylene group
- B is preferably an electron donating group, and more preferably an amino group.
- the amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group or a cyclic amino group. Specific examples include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a piperidino group, and a morpholino group.
- B is preferably substituted at the para position with respect to Ht.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, and the ring-constituting atoms are a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of either an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
- the heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
- substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- heterocyclic group include 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, 1-methyl-1H-indol-3-yl, 2-carbazoyl and the like. . Of these, 1-alkyl-1H-indol-3-yl is preferable.
- Examples of the amino group include a group represented by —N (R 110 ) (R 111 ).
- R 110 and R 111 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. The group mentioned above is mentioned about a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
- At least one of R 110 and R 111 alkyl group is preferable, and more preferably both by R 110 and R 111 is an alkyl group. That is, the amino group is more preferably a dialkylamino group.
- L represents an arylene group, it is more preferable that both R 110 and R 111 are alkyl groups.
- R 110 and R 111 are preferably bonded to form a ring. That is, the amino group is preferably a cyclic amino group. In particular, when both R 110 and R 111 are alkyl groups, it is also preferred that they are bonded to form a ring.
- R 110 and R 111 are divalent linking groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —NH—, —CH 2 —, and combinations thereof. It is preferable to connect to form a ring.
- the divalent linking group is preferably —O— or —CH 2 —.
- X represents an anion. The anion will be described later.
- At least one of Ht, B and X has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer, and at least one of Ht and B is a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer. It is preferable that Ht has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
- the dye multimer in which Ht is bonded to the atoms constituting the dye multimer has a particularly high effect of shielding cations, and the effect of the present invention is more remarkable.
- the dye structure is preferably a dye structure represented by the formula (Ia-1).
- Y a represents a sulfur atom or —NR Ya —
- Y b represents a nitrogen atom or —CR Yb —
- R a , R Ya and R Yb each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
- R a R Ya , and R a and R Yb may be bonded to each other to form a ring
- L represents —N ⁇ N— or an arylene group
- B represents a substituent
- X represents an anion.
- at least one of R a , R Ya , R Yb , X and B has a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
- L and B in the formula (Ia-1) are synonymous with L and B in the formula (Ia) described above.
- Y a represents a sulfur atom or —NR Ya —
- Y b represents a nitrogen atom or —CR Yb —
- R a , R Ya and R Yb each independently represent a hydrogen atom or Represents a substituent.
- R a , R Ya and R Yb include the substituents exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples thereof include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
- halogen atom examples include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- the alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms.
- Examples of the alkenyl group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable.
- the alkenyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted.
- the substituent examples include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, and the ring-constituting atoms are a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of either an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
- R a and R Ya , and R a and R Yb may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
- the ring may be monocyclic or polycyclic.
- the ring is preferably an aromatic ring.
- the aromatic ring include a hydrocarbon aromatic ring and a heteroaromatic ring.
- the hydrocarbon aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, and a phenanthrene ring.
- Heteroaromatic rings include pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrrole ring, quinoline ring, quinoxaline ring, furan ring, benzofuran ring, thiophene ring, benzothiophene ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, indole ring, And a carbazole ring.
- the aromatic ring is preferably a hydrocarbon aromatic aromatic ring, and more preferably a benzene ring.
- R a , R Ya, R Yb, at least one of X and B have the binding site of the atomic group forming a dye multimer
- R a, R Ya, R Yb and B It is preferable that at least one of the above has a binding site with an atomic group constituting the dye multimer, and at least one of R a , R Ya and R Yb has a binding site with the atomic group constituting the dye multimer. More preferred.
- the dye multimer preferably has a dye structure represented by the formula (I-1) or a dye structure represented by the formula (I-2).
- R 1 and R 8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- R 2 , R 7 , R 9 to R 12 are each independently Represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent
- Y 1 represents a sulfur atom or —NR Y1 —
- R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group
- X represents an anion
- R 1 At least one of -R 2 , R 7 -R 12 , R Y1 and X has a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
- R 1 and R 8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable.
- the alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- the aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- the heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, and the ring-constituting atoms are a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of either an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
- Y 1 represents a sulfur atom or —NR Y1 —.
- R Y1 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group represented by R Y1 have the same meanings as the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group described in R 1 and R 8 , and the preferred ranges are also the same.
- R 2 , R 7 and R 9 to R 12 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- substituents include the substituents exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
- substituents include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
- Preferable ranges of the halogen atom, alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group are the same as those described for formula (Ia-1).
- R 101 , R 110 and R 111 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. R 110 and R 111 may combine to form a ring.
- R 101 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- R 110 and R 111 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and even more preferably an alkyl group.
- R 110 and R 111 are divalent linking groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —NH—, —CH 2 —, and combinations thereof.
- the divalent linking group is preferably —O— or —CH 2 —.
- the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group represented by R 101 , R 110 and R 111 have the same meanings as the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group described for R 1 and R 8 in formula (I-1), The preferable range is also the same.
- R 102 to R 105 and R 106 to R 109 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
- substituents include the substituents exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples thereof include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group. Preferable ranges of the halogen atom, alkyl group, alkenyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group are the same as those described for formula (Ia-1).
- Y 2 represents a sulfur atom or —NR Y2 —.
- R Y2 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group represented by R Y2 have the same meanings as the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group described for R 1 and R 8 in formula (I-1), and the preferred ranges are also the same. .
- X represents an anion.
- the anion may be an organic anion or an inorganic anion, and an organic anion is preferred.
- examples of the anion include a fluorine anion, a chlorine anion, a bromine anion, an iodine anion, a cyanide anion, a perchlorate anion, and a non-nucleophilic anion.
- a non-nucleophilic anion is preferable from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
- Examples of the anion include known non-nucleophilic anions described in paragraph No. 0075 of JP-A-2007-310315, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the non-nucleophilic property means a property that does not nucleophilic attack the dye by heating.
- the anion is preferably an imide anion (for example, a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion), a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion, or an anion having a boron atom, more preferably a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion, ) Imide anion is more preferred.
- an imide anion for example, a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion
- a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion or an anion having a boron atom, more preferably a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion,
- Imide anion is more preferred.
- AN-1 a structure represented by the following general formula (AN-1) is preferable.
- X 1 and X 2 each independently represent a halogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- X 1 and X 2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
- Y 1 and Y 2 each independently represent —SO 2 — or —CO—.
- X 1 and X 2 are each independently a fluorine atom or a fluorine atom-containing alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Further, a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferable.
- Y 1 and Y 2 at least one of -SO 2 - preferably represents an, both -SO 2 - and more preferably represents.
- X 3 , X 4 and X 5 each independently represent a halogen atom or an alkyl group.
- the number of carbon atoms of the alkyl group represented by X 3 , X 4 and X 5 is preferably 1 to 10, and more preferably 1 to 4.
- the alkyl group may be an unsubstituted alkyl group or may have a substituent. As the substituent, a halogen atom is preferable, and a fluorine atom is more preferable.
- X 3 , X 4 and X 5 are each independently preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having a fluorine atom, more preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom.
- the alkyl group having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Is more preferable, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferable.
- anion having a boron atom examples include a tetrafluoroborate anion, a tetraphenylborate anion, and a tetraperfluorophenylborate anion.
- the non-nucleophilic anion may further have a crosslinkable group.
- the crosslinkable group include a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond (for example, a vinyl group, an allyl group, a styryl group, a (meth) acryloyl group), a group having a cyclic ether structure such as an epoxy group or an oxetanyl group, or methylol. Groups and the like.
- the molecular weight of the anion is preferably 100 to 1,000, and more preferably 200 to 500.
- anions are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
- the anion has a binding site with an atomic group constituting the dye multimer
- a portion obtained by removing one or more atoms from the structural formulas shown in the following specific examples is the same as the atomic group constituting the dye multimer. It becomes a binding site.
- At least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 7 to R 12 , R Y1 and X has a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer
- R 1 , R 2 Preferably, at least one of R 7 to R 12 and R Y1 has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer, and at least one of R 1 , R 2 and R Y1 is an atomic group constituting a dye multimer It is more preferable to have a binding site. Yes.
- At least one of R 101 to R 109 , R Y2 and X has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer
- at least one of R 101 to R 109 and R Y2 is It preferably has a binding site with an atomic group constituting the dye multimer, and more preferably at least one of R 101 to R 105 and R Y2 has a binding site with the atomic group constituting the dye multimer.
- Substituent group A Substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, cyano groups, hydroxyl groups, nitro groups, carboxyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, silyloxy groups, heterocyclic oxy groups.
- a halogen atom for example, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom
- Alkyl group straight-chain, branched or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl) 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2-ethylhexyl), cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl.
- the cyclic alkyl group is a polycycloalkyl group such as a bicycloalkyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [1,2,2] heptan-2-yl. And groups having a polycyclic structure such as bicyclo [2,2,2] octane-3-yl) and tricycloalkyl groups.
- the cyclic alkyl group is preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group or a bicycloalkyl group, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group is particularly preferred); Alkenyl groups (straight-chain, branched or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups, preferably alkenyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl, 2-cyclopentene-1-
- the cyclic alkenyl group is a polycycloalkenyl group such as a bicycloalkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, such as Bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] oct-2-en-4-yl) and tricycloalkenyl groups are also preferred.
- a monocyclic cycloalkenyl group is particularly preferred.
- An alkynyl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group
- An aryl group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl
- Heterocyclic group (5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group is preferred, and the ring-constituting atoms are carbon, nitrogen, oxygen
- amino group, substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms is an arylamino group, a heteroarylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazine-2- Ilamino);
- An acylamino group preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, Lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3,4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino
- the dye multimer preferably has a structure in which two or more dye structures are bonded to a divalent or higher linking group.
- the dye multimer preferably has at least one selected from a repeating unit having a dye structure in the side chain and a repeating unit having a dye structure in the main chain.
- the dye multimer includes at least one of a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) described later and a repeating unit represented by the formula (C), or represented by the formula (D) described later.
- the dye multimer includes a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) (also referred to as a dye multimer (A)), and a dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by the formula (C) (dye Multimers (also referred to as multimers (C)) and multimers represented by formula (D) (also referred to as dye multimers (D)) are preferred.
- the dye multimer (A) preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the formula (A).
- the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
- the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
- a 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group
- DyeI contains two or more heteroatoms, and one or more of the heteroatoms are It represents a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle which is a nitrogen atom.
- a 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit.
- a 1 include a linking group formed by a polymerization reaction, and a main chain derived from a compound having a (meth) acryl group, a styrene group, a vinyl group, or an ether group is preferable. Also preferred is an embodiment in which the main chain has a cyclic alkylene group.
- a 1 is not particularly limited as long as it is a linking group formed from a known polymerizable monomer.
- a 1 is preferably a linking group represented by the following (XX-1) to (XX-25), (XX-1), (XX-2), (XX-10) to (XX-17), More preferably selected from (XX-18), (XX-19), (XX-24) and (XX-25), and (XX-1), (XX-2), (XX-10) to More preferably, it is selected from (XX-17), (XX-24) and (XX-25).
- * is a binding site with L 1 in formula (A).
- Me represents a methyl group.
- R in (XX-18) and (XX-19) represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a phenyl group.
- L 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group include an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O )-, -COO-, -NR-, -CONR-, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 -and a linking group formed by linking two or more thereof.
- each R independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group.
- the alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, and still more preferably 20 or less.
- the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
- the alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described in the substituent group A.
- the carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12.
- the arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described in the substituent group A.
- the heterocyclic linking group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
- the hetero atom that the heterocyclic linking group has is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom.
- the number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic linking group is preferably 1 to 3.
- the heterocyclic linking group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described in the substituent group A.
- DyeI represents a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom.
- the dye structure is preferably a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms are removed from the cation or anion of the dye compound having a dye skeleton having a cationic heterocycle and an anion as described above. A structure in which one or more are removed is more preferable.
- the dye structure represented by DyeI may be the above-mentioned cations bound to A 1 or L 1 in formula (A), the anion is the A 1 or L 1 in formula (A) It is preferable that the cation is bonded to A 1 or L 1 of the formula (A).
- the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) include a repeating unit represented by the formula (A-1) and a repeating unit represented by the formula (A-2).
- the repeating unit represented by 1) is preferred. According to this aspect, the cation part of the dye structure is easily shielded by the polymer chain, aggregation of the dye multimer can be suppressed, and a more excellent effect can be easily obtained.
- a 1 represents the main chain of the repeating unit
- L 1a and L 1b each independently represent a single bond or a divalent linking group
- DyeI-1 and DyeI-2 each independently represent 2
- a cation having a cationic heterocycle containing the above heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom is represented
- X1 and X2 each independently represent an anion.
- examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1a include the divalent linking group described for L 1 in the formula (A).
- L 1a is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, an arylene group, —NH—, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S—, and a linking group in which two or more thereof are combined,
- a single bond or a divalent group formed by combining an alkylene group, an arylene group, and one or more selected from —O—, —COO—, and —OCO— is more preferable.
- the cation represented by DyeI-1 is preferably a cation having the dye structure of formula (I-1) or formula (I-2) described above. Moreover, as an anion which X1 represents, the anion demonstrated by the pigment
- examples of the divalent linking group represented by L 1b include the divalent linking groups described for L 1 in the formula (A).
- L 1b is preferably a single bond, or an alkylene group, an arylene group, —NH—, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —SO 2 — and a combination group of two or more thereof.
- An alkylene group, —O—, —SO 2 — and a linking group obtained by combining two or more thereof are preferred.
- the alkylene group and the arylene group preferably have a substituent.
- an electron withdrawing group is preferable, and a halogen atom (fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom), nitro group, cyano group, halogenated alkyl group (for example, trifluoromethyl group), aryl halide Group and the like.
- the cation represented by DyeI-2 is preferably a cation having the dye structure of formula (I-1) or formula (I-2) described above. Moreover, as an anion which X2 represents, the anion demonstrated by the pigment
- Specific examples of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A-2) include structures described in paragraph numbers 0162 to 0166 in JP-A-2014-199436.
- the dye multimer containing the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is (1) a method of synthesizing a dye compound having a polymerizable group by addition polymerization, (2) an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride group, an epoxy group, or the like.
- the polymer having a highly reactive functional group can be synthesized by a method of reacting a dye compound having a functional group (hydroxyl group, primary or secondary amino group, carboxyl group, etc.) capable of reacting with the highly reactive group.
- Known addition polymerizations (radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, and cationic polymerization) can be applied to the addition polymerization.
- the dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is preferably a radical polymer obtained by radical polymerization using a dye compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond from the viewpoint of heat resistance. .
- repeating unit represented by the formula (A) include the following.
- Me is a methyl group
- Et is an ethyl group.
- repeating unit represented by the formula (A-2) include the following.
- the dye multimer in the present invention may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit represented by the formula (A).
- Other repeating units may contain a functional group such as a curable group or an acid group. It does not have to contain a functional group.
- the dye multimer preferably has at least one selected from a repeating unit having an acid group and a repeating unit having a curable group.
- Examples of the curable group include a radical polymerizable group, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group.
- Examples of the radically polymerizable group include groups containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- the curable group is preferably a radical polymerizable group.
- the ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass with respect to all repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
- the lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
- Other functional groups include groups consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, development promoting groups such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryls Groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxyl groups, maleimide groups, amino group and other hydrophilicity adjusting groups, and the like can be appropriately introduced.
- the number of repeating alkyleneoxy chains is more preferably 2 to 15, and further preferably 2 to 10.
- One alkyleneoxy chain is represented by — (CH 2 ) n O—, where n is an integer, n is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 2 or 3.
- the dye multimer (C) preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the formula (C).
- the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer.
- the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
- L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and DyeIII is bonded to a cationic heterocyclic ring containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom.
- L 3 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group include an alkylene group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, an arylene group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a heterocyclic linking group, —CH ⁇ CH—, —O—, —S—, —C ( ⁇ O )-, -COO-, -NR-, -CONR-, -OCO-, -SO-, -SO 2 -and a linking group formed by linking two or more thereof.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group each independently.
- the alkyl group and alkylene group preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms.
- the upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, and still more preferably 20 or less.
- the lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more.
- the alkyl group and alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group and arylene group is preferably 6-20, and more preferably 6-12.
- the heterocyclic linking group and the heterocyclic group are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring.
- the hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic linking group and the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom.
- the number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic linking group and the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
- the alkylene group, arylene group, heterocyclic linking group, alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent.
- the substituent include a curable group and an acid group.
- the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group.
- Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group.
- a hydrophilic group such as an oxide group, a hydroxyl group, a maleimide group, an amino group, etc. as a substituent.
- L 3 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, —NH—, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S—, or a linking group in which two or more thereof are combined.
- DyeIII represents a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom.
- the dye structure is preferably a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms are removed from the cation or anion of the dye compound having a dye skeleton having a cationic heterocycle and an anion as described above. A structure in which one or more are removed is more preferable.
- m represents 0 or 1, and 1 is preferable.
- repeating unit represented by the formula (C) include the following.
- the dye multimer (C) may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit represented by the formula (C).
- n is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 14, still more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and further preferably 2 to 6.
- the total of n and k is 2 to 20, preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 14, still more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and most preferably 2 to 6.
- n and k in one dye multimer are integers, respectively, but in the present invention, a plurality of dye multimers in which n and k in formula (D) are different may be included. Therefore, the average value of n and k in the coloring composition of the present invention may not be an integer.
- (N + k) -valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included.
- Specific examples of the (n + k) -valent linking group include a group composed of a combination of two or more of the following structural units or the following structural units (which may form a ring structure). .
- (n + k) -valent linking groups are shown below. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
- a linking group described in paragraph Nos. 0071 to 0072 of JP-A-2008-222950 and a linking group described in paragraph No. 0176 of JP-A-2013-029760 are also included.
- P represents a substituent.
- the substituent include an acid group and a curable group.
- the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group.
- the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
- the substituent represented by P may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit.
- the monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit is preferably a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound.
- the k Ps may be the same or different.
- P has 2 to 20 repeating units derived from a vinyl compound (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10).
- the average number of repeating units derived from k P vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10).
- the number of repeating units of P when k is 1 and the average number of repeating units of P when k is 2 or more are expressed as It can be determined by resonance (NMR).
- examples of the repeating unit constituting P include other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A). It is preferable that another repeating unit has 1 or more types chosen from the repeating unit which has the acid group mentioned above, and the repeating unit which has a sclerosing
- the repeating unit having an acid group is contained, the developability can be improved.
- the repeating unit having a curable group is included, the solvent resistance can be further improved.
- the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P.
- the ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P. .
- P contains a repeating unit having a curable group, color unevenness and the like can be further improved.
- DyeIV represents a dye structure.
- the dye structure represented by DyeIV is preferably a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms have been removed from the cation or anion of the dye compound having a cation having a dye skeleton having a cationic heterocycle and an anion.
- a structure in which one or more atoms are removed is more preferable. That is, in the present invention, the dye structure represented by DyeIV preferably has the aforementioned cation bonded to L 4 of the formula (D).
- the dye structure represented by DyeIV is a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms of the dye compound are removed, and a part of the dye compound may be bonded to L 4.
- the polymer chain may include a repeating unit having a dye structure (a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms of the dye compound are removed) in the side chain.
- the polymer chain is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye structure, but is one kind selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. Is preferred.
- the repeating unit of the polymer chain is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the above formula (A) and the repeating unit represented by the above formula (C).
- the total number of repeating units having a dye structure in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and further preferably 20 to 40 mol%. preferable.
- the polymer chain may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having a dye structure. As other repeating units, it is preferable to have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a curable group.
- the ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units of the polymer chain, and 10 to 40 mol.
- the ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 mol, more preferably 10 to 40 mol, relative to 100 mol of all repeating units of the polymer chain. preferable.
- the dye multimer represented by the formula (D) can be synthesized by the following method.
- Polymer reaction method (2) A method of Michael addition reaction between a compound having a carbon-carbon double bond introduced at the terminal and a thiol compound having a dye structure.
- a method in which a compound in which a carbon-carbon double bond is introduced at a terminal and a thiol compound having a dye structure are reacted in the presence of a radical generator.
- the dye multimer (D) preferably has a structure represented by the formula (D-1). (D 1 -L 42) n -L 4 - (L 41 -P 1) k ⁇ (D-1)
- L 4 represents an (n + k) -valent linking group.
- n represents an integer of 2 to 20, and k represents an integer of 0 to 20.
- D 1 represents a dye structure, and P 1 represents a substituent.
- n + k represents an integer of 2 to 20.
- L 4 , n and k are the same as L 4, n and k of the formula (D), and preferred ranges are also the same.
- L 41 and L 42 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of L 41 and L 42 are present, they may be the same or different. Divalent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
- divalent linking group examples include the following structural units or groups formed by combining two or more of the following structural units.
- P 1 represents a substituent.
- the substituent include an acid group and a curable group.
- the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group.
- the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
- the substituent represented by P 1 may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit.
- the monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit is preferably a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound.
- k P 1 s may be the same or different.
- P 1 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 1, P 1 has 2 to 20 repeating units derived from a vinyl compound (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 Monovalent polymer chains having ⁇ 10) are preferred.
- the average number of repeating units derived from k P 1 vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 ( The number is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10.
- D 1 represents a dye structure.
- the dye structure represented by D 1 may be one in which a part of the dye compound is bonded to L 42 , or may be a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye structure in the main chain or side chain.
- the polymer chain is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye structure, but is preferably one selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. .
- the repeating unit of the polymer chain is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the above formula (A) and the repeating unit represented by the above formula (C).
- the total number of repeating units having a dye structure in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and further preferably 20 to 40 mol%. preferable.
- the polymer chain may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having a dye structure. As other repeating units, it is preferable to have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a curable group.
- the dye multimer (D) preferably has a structure represented by the formula (D-2).
- L 4 represents an (n + k) -valent linking group.
- n represents an integer of 2 to 20, and k represents an integer of 0 to 20.
- D 2 represents a dye structure, and P 2 represents a substituent.
- B 1 and B 2 are each independently a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR—. Represents.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- C 1 and C 2 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- S represents a sulfur atom.
- n 2 or more, the plurality of D 2 may be different from each other, and when k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 2 may be different from each other.
- n + k represents an integer of 2 to 20.
- L 4 , n and k are the same as L 4, n and k of the formula (D), and preferred ranges are also the same.
- B 1 and B 2 are each independently a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, — NROC-, or represents -CONR-, single bond, -O -, - CO -, - O 2 C -, - CO 2 -, - NROC-, or -CONR- is preferred.
- R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
- the alkyl group represented by R preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R is preferably 6-30, and more preferably 6-12.
- R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
- C 1 and C 2 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- the divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group or an oxyalkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene group.
- the alkylene group and oxyalkylene group preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group and oxyalkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- the number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 12.
- P 2 represents a substituent.
- the substituent include an acid group and a curable group.
- the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group.
- the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
- the substituent represented by P 2 may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit.
- the monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit is preferably a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound.
- k P 2 s may be the same or different.
- P 2 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 1, P 2 contains 2 to 20 repeating units derived from a vinyl compound (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 Monovalent polymer chains having ⁇ 10) are preferred.
- the average number of repeating units derived from k P 2 vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 ( The number is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10.
- examples of the repeating unit constituting P 2 include the other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) described above. It is preferable that another repeating unit has 1 or more types chosen from the repeating unit which has the acid group mentioned above, and the repeating unit which has a sclerosing
- the ratio of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P 2 .
- the proportion of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P 2. preferable.
- D 2 represents a dye structure.
- the dye structure represented by D 2 may be one in which a part of the dye compound is bonded to —S—, or may be a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye structure in the main chain or side chain.
- the polymer chain is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye structure, but is preferably one selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins.
- the repeating unit of the polymer chain is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the above formula (A) and the repeating unit represented by the above formula (C).
- the total number of repeating units having a dye structure in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and further preferably 20 to 40 mol%. preferable.
- the polymer chain may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having a dye structure. As other repeating units, it is preferable to have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a curable group.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50000.
- the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 6000 or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 30000 or less, and still more preferably 20000 or less.
- the ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 2.0, and 1.1 to 1. 8 is more preferable, and 1.1 to 1.5 is particularly preferable.
- dye multimer is a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement, Specifically, the value measured by the method as described in the Example mentioned later. It is.
- the acid value of the dye multimer is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 27 mgKOH / g or more, and particularly preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more.
- the upper limit of the acid value is preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 180 mgKOH / g or less, still more preferably 130 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
- the curable group value of the dye multimer is preferably 0.1 mmol / g or more, more preferably 0.2 mmol / g or more, and still more preferably 0.3 mmol / g or more.
- the upper limit of the curable group value is not particularly limited, but is preferably 2.0 mmol / g or less, and more preferably 1.5 mmol / g or less.
- the curable group value can be calculated by dividing the number of curable groups introduced into the dye multimer by the molecular weight of the dye multimer. It can also be actually measured by analysis means such as 1 H-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
- the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains 0.01 to 50% by mass of the above-mentioned dye multimer in the total solid content of the colored composition of the present invention.
- the lower limit is preferably 0.1% by mass or more, and more preferably 0.5% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 30% by mass or less, and more preferably 15% by mass or less.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can further use a coloring agent (other coloring agent) other than the above-described dye multimer.
- the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains another colorant.
- the other colorant may be either a dye or a pigment, or a combination of both.
- Other colorants are preferably pigments.
- the other colorant may be a dye multimer.
- the pigment examples include conventionally known various inorganic pigments or organic pigments.
- the primary particle size of the pigment is preferably 100 nm or less from the viewpoint of color unevenness and contrast. Moreover, it is preferable that it is 5 nm or more from a viewpoint of dispersion stability.
- the primary particle size of the pigment is more preferably 5 to 75 nm, further preferably 5 to 55 nm, and particularly preferably 5 to 35 nm.
- the primary particle size of the pigment can be measured by a known method such as an electron microscope.
- inorganic pigments include metal compounds such as metal oxides and metal complex salts.
- black pigments such as carbon black and titanium black, iron, cobalt, aluminum, cadmium, lead, copper, titanium, Mention may be made of metal oxides such as magnesium, chromium, zinc and antimony, and composite oxides of the above metals.
- I. Pigment Black 1 Further, as the green pigment, a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms in the molecule of 10 to 14, bromine atoms on average 8 to 12, and chlorine atoms on average 2 to 5 should be used. Is also possible. Specific examples include the compounds described in WO2015 / 118720.
- quinophthalone pigments described in paragraphs 0011 to 0034 of JP2013-54339A quinophthalone pigments described in paragraphs 0013 to 0058 of JP2014-26228A, and the like can also be used. These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase color purity.
- Examples of the dye include JP-A 64-90403, JP-A 64-91102, JP-A-1-94301, JP-A-6-11614, Japanese Patent No. 2592207, and US Pat. No. 4,808,501. No. 5,667,920, U.S. Pat. No. 505950, JP-A-5-333207, JP-A-6-35183, JP-A-6-51115, JP-A-6-194828, etc. Can be used.
- pyrazole azo compounds When classified as a chemical structure, pyrazole azo compounds, pyromethene compounds, anilinoazo compounds, triphenylmethane compounds, anthraquinone compounds, benzylidene compounds, oxonol compounds, pyrazolotriazole azo compounds, pyridone azo compounds, cyanine compounds, phenothiazine compounds, pyrrolopyrazole azomethine compounds, etc. Can be used.
- a dye multimer may be used as the dye.
- Examples of the dye multimer include compounds described in JP2011-213925A, JP2013-041097A, JP2015-028144A, JP2015-030742A, and the like.
- the content of the other coloring agent is preferably 10 to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition.
- the upper limit is more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less.
- the lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, and further preferably 25% by mass or more.
- the coloring composition of this invention can also be set as the aspect which does not contain other coloring agents substantially.
- substantially free of other colorants means, for example, preferably 0.1% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the colorants (total mass of the dye multimer of the present invention and other colorants). 0.05 mass% or less is more preferable, and it is still more preferable not to contain other colorants.
- the colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin.
- the resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment or the like in the composition and the purpose of a binder.
- a resin used mainly for dispersing a colorant such as a pigment is also referred to as a dispersant.
- the resin can be used for purposes other than such use.
- the resin content is preferably 10 to 80% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colorable composition.
- the lower limit is preferably 15% by mass or more, and more preferably 20% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 70% by mass or less, and more preferably 60% by mass or less.
- the coloring composition of this invention contains a dispersing agent as resin.
- the dispersant preferably includes at least an acidic dispersant, and more preferably only an acidic dispersant.
- the dispersant includes at least an acidic dispersant, the dispersibility of the pigment is improved and luminance unevenness is less likely to occur. Furthermore, since excellent developability can be obtained, pattern formation can be suitably performed by photolithography.
- content of an acidic dispersing agent is 99 mass% or more in the total mass of a dispersing agent, for example that a dispersing agent is only an acidic dispersing agent, and shall be 99.9 mass% or more. You can also.
- the acidic dispersant represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups.
- the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups occupies 70 mol% or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%. A resin consisting only of groups is more preferred.
- the acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxyl group.
- the basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups.
- the basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups accounts for 50 mol% or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%.
- the basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amine.
- the acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 40 to 105 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 to 105 mgKOH / g, and still more preferably 60 to 105 mgKOH / g.
- the dispersant examples include a polymer dispersant [for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth). Acrylic copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate], polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkylamine, alkanolamine and the like.
- a polymer dispersant for example, polyamidoamine and its salt, polycarboxylic acid and its salt, high molecular weight unsaturated acid ester, modified polyurethane, modified polyester, modified poly (meth) acrylate, (meth).
- Acrylic copolymer, naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin condensate] polyoxyethylene alkyl phosphate ester, polyoxyethylene alkylamine, alkanolamine and the like.
- Polymer dispersants can be further classified into linear polymers, terminal-modified polymers, graft polymers, and block polymers based on their structures.
- the polymer dispersant acts to adsorb on the surface of the pigment and prevent reaggregation. Therefore, a terminal-modified polymer, a graft polymer and a block polymer having an anchor site to the pigment surface can be mentioned as preferred structures.
- a graft copolymer containing a repeating unit represented by any of the following formulas (1) to (4) can also be used.
- W 1 , W 2 , W 3 , and W 4 each independently represent an oxygen atom or NH
- X 1 , X 2 , X 3 , X 4 , and X 5 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
- Y 1 , Y 2 , Y 3 , and Y 4 each independently represent a divalent linking group
- Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 each independently represents a monovalent organic group
- R 3 represents an alkylene group
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group
- n, m, p, and q each independently represents 1 to Represents an integer of 500
- j and k each independently represent an integer of 2 to 8
- a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different from each other.
- may, in the formula (4), when q is 2 ⁇ 500, X 5 and R 4 existing in plural numbers may be different
- an alkyl group, a hydroxyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group examples thereof include an alkylthioether group, an arylthioether group, a heteroarylthioether group, and an amino group.
- the organic group represented by Z 1 , Z 2 , Z 3 , and Z 4 those having a steric repulsion effect are particularly preferable from the viewpoint of improving dispersibility, and each independently has 5 to 24 carbon atoms.
- a branched alkyl group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms, or an alkoxy group having 5 to 24 carbon atoms is particularly preferable.
- the alkyl group contained in the alkoxy group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
- n, m, p, and q are each independently an integer of 1 to 500.
- j and k each independently represent an integer of 2 to 8.
- J and k in the formulas (1) and (2) are preferably integers of 4 to 6 and most preferably 5 from the viewpoints of dispersion stability and developability.
- R 3 represents an alkylene group, preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, more preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
- p is 2 to 500, a plurality of R 3 may be the same or different.
- R 4 represents a hydrogen atom or a monovalent organic group.
- the monovalent organic group is not particularly limited in terms of structure.
- R 4 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heteroaryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
- R 4 is an alkyl group, a linear alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a branched alkyl group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, or a cyclic alkyl group having 5 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable, and 1 to 20 carbon atoms is preferable.
- linear alkyl groups having 1 to 6 carbon atoms are particularly preferable.
- q is 2 to 500
- a plurality of X 5 and R 4 present in the graft copolymer may be the same or different from each other.
- graft copolymer the description of paragraphs 0025 to 0094 of JP2012-255128A can be referred to, and the above contents are incorporated in this specification.
- Specific examples of the graft copolymer include resins described in paragraph numbers 0072 to 0094 of JP2012-255128A, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- an oligoimine dispersant containing a nitrogen atom in at least one of the main chain and the side chain can be used.
- the oligoimine-based dispersant has a repeating unit having a partial structure X having a functional group of pKa14 or less and a side chain containing a side chain Y having 40 to 10,000 atoms, and has a main chain and a side chain.
- a resin having at least one basic nitrogen atom is preferred.
- the basic nitrogen atom is not particularly limited as long as it is a basic nitrogen atom.
- oligoimine-based dispersant the description in paragraphs 0102 to 0174 of JP 2012-255128 A can be referred to, and the above contents are incorporated in this specification.
- resins described in paragraph numbers 0168 to 0174 of JP 2012-255128 A can be used.
- the dispersant is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples thereof include “DA-7301” manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamidoamine phosphate)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, 107 (carboxylic acid).
- Ester 110 (copolymer containing an acid group), 111 (phosphate dispersing agent), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer), BYK -P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) "," EFKA 4047, 4050-4165 (polyurethane type), EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer), 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (manufactured by EFKA) Polyester amide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 Fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative) ”,“ Ajispur PB821, PB822, PB880, PB881 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd.,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer), Polyflow No.
- P341 “EFKA-46, EFKA-47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450” manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd., “Disperse Aid 6, manufactured by San Nopco Co., Ltd. Disperse Aid 8, Disperse Aid 15, Disperse Aid 9100 and other polymer dispersants, ADEKA Co., Ltd.
- the coloring composition of this invention can contain alkali-soluble resin as resin. By containing an alkali-soluble resin, developability and pattern formation are improved.
- the alkali-soluble resin can also be used as a dispersant or a binder.
- the molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly defined, but the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5000 to 100,000.
- the number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
- the alkali-soluble resin may be a linear organic polymer, and has at least one alkali-soluble polymer in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having groups to promote.
- the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polyhydroxystyrene resin, a polysiloxane resin, an acrylic resin, an acrylamide resin, or an acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resin from the viewpoint of heat resistance.
- Acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
- Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. What can be developed is preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- a known radical polymerization method can be applied.
- Polymerization conditions such as temperature, pressure, type and amount of radical initiator, type of solvent, etc. when producing an alkali-soluble resin by radical polymerization can be easily set by those skilled in the art, and the conditions are determined experimentally. It can also be done.
- the alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polymer having a carboxyl group in the side chain, such as a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partially esterified malein.
- a polymer having a carboxyl group in the side chain such as a methacrylic acid copolymer, an acrylic acid copolymer, an itaconic acid copolymer, a crotonic acid copolymer, a maleic acid copolymer, and a partially esterified malein.
- alkali-soluble phenol resins such as novolac resins
- acidic cellulose derivatives having a carboxyl group in the side chain and polymers having a hydroxyl group added with an acid anhydride.
- Examples of other monomers copolymerizable with (meth) acrylic acid include alkyl (meth) acrylates, aryl (meth) acrylates, and vinyl compounds.
- alkyl (meth) acrylate and aryl (meth) acrylate methyl (meth) acrylate, ethyl (meth) acrylate, propyl (meth) acrylate, butyl (meth) acrylate, isobutyl (meth) acrylate, pentyl (meth) acrylate
- Examples of vinyl compounds such as hexyl (meth) acrylate, octyl (meth) acrylate, phenyl (meth) acrylate, benzyl (meth) acrylate, tolyl (meth) acrylate, naphthyl (meth) acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth) acrylate, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene, vinylto
- N-substituted maleimide monomers described in JP-A-10-300922 can be used. Examples thereof include N-phenylmaleimide and N-cyclohexylmaleimide. In addition, only 1 type may be sufficient as the other monomer copolymerizable with these (meth) acrylic acids, and 2 or more types may be sufficient as it.
- Alkali-soluble resins include benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / (meth) acrylic acid / 2-hydroxyethyl (meth) acrylate copolymer, benzyl (meth) acrylate / Multi-component copolymers composed of (meth) acrylic acid / other monomers can be preferably used.
- an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group may be used as the alkali-soluble resin.
- the polymerizable group include a (meth) allyl group and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group an alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group in the side chain is useful.
- the alkali-soluble resin having a polymerizable group include Dianal NR series (manufactured by Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.), Photomer 6173 (COOH-containing polyurethane acrylic oligomer.
- Diamond Shamrock Co., Ltd. Biscote R-264, KS resist 106 (any) Also manufactured by Osaka Organic Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), Cyclomer P series (for example, ACA230AA), Plaxel CF200 series (both manufactured by Daicel Corporation), Ebecryl 3800 (manufactured by Daicel UCB Corporation), Acryl RD-F8 (Japan) Catalyst).
- Cyclomer P series for example, ACA230AA
- Plaxel CF200 series both manufactured by Daicel Corporation
- Ebecryl 3800 manufactured by Daicel UCB Corporation
- Acryl RD-F8 Japan Catalyst
- the alkali-soluble resin is a compound represented by the following general formula (ED1) and / or a compound represented by the general formula (1) of JP 2010-168539 A (hereinafter, these compounds are referred to as “ether dimers”). It is also preferable to include a polymer obtained by polymerizing a monomer component including
- R 1 and R 2 each independently represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 25 carbon atoms which may have a substituent.
- ether dimer for example, paragraph 0317 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification. Only one type of ether dimer may be used, or two or more types may be used.
- the alkali-soluble resin may contain a repeating unit derived from a compound represented by the following formula (X).
- R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group
- R 2 represents an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms
- R 3 represents a hydrogen atom or a benzene ring that may contain a benzene ring.
- n represents an integer of 1 to 15.
- the alkylene group of R 2 preferably has 2 to 3 carbon atoms.
- the alkyl group of R 3 has 1 to 20 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 10, and the alkyl group of R 3 may contain a benzene ring.
- Examples of the alkyl group containing a benzene ring represented by R 3 include a benzyl group and a 2-phenyl (iso) propyl group.
- alkali-soluble resin examples include the following resins.
- Me is a methyl group.
- the acid value of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 30 to 500 mgKOH / g.
- the lower limit is more preferably 50 mgKOH / g or more, and still more preferably 70 mgKOH / g or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 400 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, particularly preferably 150 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
- the content of the alkali-soluble resin is preferably 0.1 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition.
- the lower limit is preferably 1% by mass or more, and more preferably 2% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 15% by mass or less, and more preferably 10% by mass or less.
- the colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of alkali-soluble resin, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent.
- the solvent is preferably an organic solvent.
- the solvent is not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied.
- organic solvents include the following.
- esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, cyclohexyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyloxyalkyl acetate (Eg, methyl alkyloxyacetate, ethyl alkyloxyacetate, butyl alkyloxyacetate (eg, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate)), alkyl 3-alkyloxypropionate Esters (eg, methyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, ethyl 3-alkyloxypropionate, etc.
- Organic solvents may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
- It is a mixed solution composed of two or more selected from methyl, 2-heptanone, cyclohexanone, ethyl carbitol acetate, butyl carbitol acetate, propylene glycol methyl ether and propylene glycol methyl ether acetate.
- the organic solvent preferably has a peroxide content of 0.8 mmol / L or less, and more preferably contains substantially no peroxide.
- the content of the solvent is preferably such that the total solid content of the colored composition is 5 to 80% by mass.
- the lower limit is preferably 10% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is preferably 60% by mass or less, more preferably 50% by mass or less, and further preferably 40% by mass or less.
- the coloring composition of the present invention contains a curable compound.
- a curable compound known compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used.
- a compound having a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane) group, a methylol group and the like can be mentioned.
- the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
- the curable compound is preferably a polymerizable compound, and more preferably a radical polymerizable compound.
- the content of the curable compound is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition.
- the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 45% by mass or less, and still more preferably 40% by mass or less.
- One curable compound may be used alone, or two or more curable compounds may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
- the polymerizable compound may be in a chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer, that is, a dimer, a trimer and an oligomer, or a mixture thereof and a multimer thereof.
- a monomer is preferable.
- the molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000.
- the upper limit is preferably 2000 or less, and more preferably 1500 or less.
- the lower limit is preferably 150 or more, and more preferably 250 or more.
- the polymerizable compounds are dipentaerythritol triacrylate (KAYARAD D-330 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), dipentaerythritol tetraacrylate (KAYARAD D-320 as a commercial product; manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.).
- the preferred acid value of the polymerizable compound having an acid group is 0.1 to 40 mgKOH / g, particularly preferably 5 to 30 mgKOH / g. If the acid value of the polymerizable compound is 0.1 mgKOH / g or more, the development and dissolution characteristics are good, and if it is 40 mgKOH / g or less, it is advantageous in production and handling. Furthermore, the photopolymerization performance is good and the curability is excellent.
- the polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having a caprolactone structure.
- examples of the polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure are commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120 and the like.
- a polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group can also be used.
- the polymerizable compound having an alkyleneoxy group is preferably a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group and / or a propyleneoxy group, more preferably a polymerizable compound having an ethyleneoxy group, and 3 to 4 having 4 to 20 ethyleneoxy groups.
- a hexafunctional (meth) acrylate compound is more preferable.
- Examples of commercially available polymerizable compounds having an alkyleneoxy group include SR-494, which is a tetrafunctional acrylate having four ethyleneoxy groups manufactured by Sartomer, and six pentyleneoxy groups manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. DPCA-60, which is a hexafunctional acrylate, and TPA-330, which is a trifunctional acrylate having three isobutyleneoxy groups.
- urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA -306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
- the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition.
- the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 45% by mass or less, and still more preferably 40% by mass or less.
- One curable compound may be used alone, or two or more curable compounds may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
- the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 30 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the curable compound.
- a compound having an epoxy group can also be used as the curable compound.
- a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule is preferable. It is preferable to have 2 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule.
- the upper limit may be 10 or less, and may be 5 or less.
- the compound having an epoxy group preferably has a structure having an aromatic ring and / or an aliphatic ring, and more preferably has a structure having an aliphatic ring.
- the epoxy group is preferably bonded to the aromatic ring and / or the aliphatic ring via a single bond or a linking group.
- the linking group include an alkylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —NR ′ — (R ′ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent.
- the epoxy group is preferably a compound formed by directly bonding (single bond) to the aliphatic ring.
- the epoxy group is preferably a compound formed by bonding to an aromatic ring via a linking group.
- the linking group is preferably an alkylene group or a group comprising a combination of an alkylene group and —O—.
- the compound which has an epoxy group can also use the compound which has a structure which two or more aromatic rings connected with the hydrocarbon group.
- the hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is preferable that the epoxy group is connected via the connecting group.
- the compound having an epoxy group may be a low molecular weight compound (for example, a molecular weight of less than 2000, or even a molecular weight of less than 1000), or a macromolecule (for example, a molecular weight of 1000 or more, in the case of a polymer, the weight average molecular weight is 1000 or more).
- the weight average molecular weight of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 200 to 100,000, more preferably 500 to 50,000.
- the upper limit of the weight average molecular weight is preferably 3000 or less, more preferably 2000 or less, and still more preferably 1500 or less.
- bisphenol A type epoxy resin jER825, jER827, jER828, jER834, jER1001, jER1002, jER1003, jER1055, jER1007, jER1009, jER1010 (above, manufactured by Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON860, EPICLON1050 , EPICLON1051, EPICLON1055 (manufactured by DIC Corporation), etc.
- bisphenol F-type epoxy resins include jER806, jER807, jER4004, jER4005, jER4007, jER4010 (above, Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation), EPICLON830, EPICLON835.
- Cresol novolac type epoxy resins include EPICLON N-660, EPICLON N-665, EPICLON N-670, EPICLON N-673, EPICLON N-680, EPICLON N-690, EPICLON N-695 (or more DIC Co., Ltd.), EOCN-1020 (Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), etc., and aliphatic epoxy resins are ADEKA RESIN EP-4080S, EP-4085.
- the content of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition.
- the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and still more preferably 20% by mass or less.
- the compound which has an epoxy group may be single 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
- the content of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 1 to 80% by mass and more preferably 1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the curable compound.
- a curing accelerator may be added for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature.
- the curing accelerator include polyfunctional thiol compounds having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule.
- the polyfunctional thiol compound may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like.
- the polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol, and particularly preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (T1).
- T1 In the formula (T1), n represents an integer of 2 to 4, and L represents a divalent to tetravalent linking group.
- the linking group L is preferably an aliphatic group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms, particularly preferably n is 2 and L is an alkylene group having 2 to 12 carbon atoms.
- Specific examples of the polyfunctional thiol compound include compounds represented by the following structural formulas (T2) to (T4), and a compound represented by the formula (T2) is particularly preferable. These polyfunctional thiol compounds can be used alone or in combination.
- Curing accelerators include methylol compounds (for example, compounds exemplified as a crosslinking agent in paragraph 0246 of JP-A-2015-34963), amines, phosphonium salts, amidine salts, amide compounds (above, for example, special No. 2013-41165, curing agent described in paragraph 0186), base generator (for example, ionic compound described in JP-A-2014-55114), cyanate compound (for example, JP-A-2012-150180) A compound described in paragraph 0071), an alkoxysilane compound (for example, an alkoxysilane compound having an epoxy group described in JP2011-255304A), an onium salt compound (for example, paragraph 0216 in JP2015-34963A).
- Compounds exemplified as acid generators, JP2009 Compounds described in JP-180949 can also be used.
- the content of the curing accelerator is preferably 0.3 to 8.9% by mass, and preferably 0.8 to 6% based on the total solid content of the colored composition. More preferably, 4% by mass.
- the colored composition of the present invention preferably further contains a photopolymerization initiator.
- the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer.
- the photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
- Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (for example, those having a triazine skeleton, those having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds such as acylphosphine oxide, hexaarylbiimidazole, and oxime derivatives. Oxime compounds such as organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ketoxime ethers, aminoacetophenone compounds, and hydroxyacetophenones. Examples of commercially available trihalomethyltriazine photopolymerization initiators include TAZ-107 (manufactured by Midori Chemical Co., Ltd.).
- trihalomethyltriazine compounds trihalomethyltriazine compounds, benzyldimethylketal compounds, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, ⁇ -aminoketone compounds, acylphosphine compounds, phosphine oxide compounds, metallocene compounds, oxime compounds, triarylimidazole compounds, benzimidazoles Compound selected from the group consisting of compounds, onium compounds, benzothiazole compounds, benzophenone compounds, acetophenone compounds and derivatives thereof, cyclopentadiene-benzene-iron complexes and salts thereof, halomethyloxadiazole compounds, 3-aryl substituted coumarin compounds Is preferred.
- the triarylimidazole compound, benzimidazole compound, and benzophenone compound include the following compounds.
- hydroxyacetophenone compounds As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
- hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
- aminoacetophenone-based initiator commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used.
- aminoacetophenone-based initiator compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 whose absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source of 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used.
- acylphosphine initiator commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
- the colored composition of the present invention when used for the production of a color filter of a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It is important that it be developed. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator.
- an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator.
- a stepper exposure machine is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, in view of these points, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device.
- oxime compound can improve the color transfer.
- paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
- photopolymerization initiator examples include oxime compounds.
- oxime compounds compounds described in JP-A No. 2001-233842, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-80068, and compounds described in JP-A No. 2006-342166 can be used.
- oxime compounds examples include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995), pp. 156-162. 202-232, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
- IRGACURE-OXE01 manufactured by BASF
- IRGACURE-OXE02 manufactured by BASF
- TRONLY TR-PBG-304 TRONLY TR-PBG-309, TRONLY TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO., LTD), Adeka Arcles 30 (Made by ADEKA) can also be used.
- oxime compounds other than those described above compounds described in JP-T 2009-519904, in which an oxime is linked to the N-position of the carbazole ring, and those described in US Pat. No. 7,626,957 in which a hetero substituent is introduced into the benzophenone moiety
- compounds described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-15025 and US Patent Publication No. 2009-292039 in which a nitro group is introduced at the dye site ketoxime compounds described in International Publication No. WO2009 / 131189, and triazine skeleton and oxime skeleton are the same A compound described in US Pat. No.
- the oxime compound is preferably a compound represented by the following formula (OX-1).
- the oxime N—O bond may be an (E) oxime compound, a (Z) oxime compound, or a mixture of (E) and (Z) isomers. .
- R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent
- A represents a divalent organic group
- Ar represents an aryl group.
- the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
- the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group.
- these groups may have one or more substituents.
- the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
- the substituent examples include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
- the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
- the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
- an oxime compound having a fluorene ring can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
- Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorene ring include compounds described in JP-A No. 2014-137466. This content is incorporated herein.
- an oxime compound having a fluorine atom can also be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
- Specific examples of the oxime compound having a fluorine atom include compounds described in JP 2010-262028 A, compounds 24 and 36 to 40 described in JP-A-2014-500852, and compounds described in JP-A 2013-164471 ( C-3). This content is incorporated herein.
- an oxime compound having a nitro group can be used as a photopolymerization initiator.
- Specific examples of oxime compounds having a nitro group include compounds described in paragraphs 0031 to 0047 of JP2013-114249A, paragraphs 0008 to 0012 and 0070 to 0079 of JP2014-137466A, ADEKA Acruz NCI-831 (made by ADEKA) is mentioned.
- oxime compounds that are preferably used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
- the oxime compound is preferably a compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 350 nm to 500 nm, more preferably a compound having an absorption wavelength in a wavelength region of 360 nm to 480 nm, and particularly preferably a compound having high absorbance at 365 nm and 405 nm.
- the molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of sensitivity. 000 is particularly preferred.
- a known method can be used. Specifically, for example, an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) is used and an ethyl acetate solvent is used. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g / L. You may use a photoinitiator in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
- the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.5%, based on the total solid content of the colored composition. -30% by mass, more preferably 1-20% by mass. Within this range, better sensitivity and pattern formability can be obtained.
- the colored composition of the present invention may contain only one type of photopolymerization initiator, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative.
- the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group, or a phthalimidomethyl group.
- the organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like.
- a sulfonic acid group As an acidic group which a pigment derivative has, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, and its quaternary ammonium base are preferable, a carboxylic acid group and a sulfonic acid group are more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable.
- the basic group possessed by the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, particularly preferably a tertiary amino group.
- the description in paragraphs 0162 to 0183 of JP2011-252065 A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the content of the pigment derivative in the colored composition of the present invention is preferably 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably 3 to 20% by mass, based on the total mass of the pigment. Only one pigment derivative may be used, or two or more pigment derivatives may be used in combination.
- the colored composition of the present invention may contain various surfactants from the viewpoint of further improving coatability.
- various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
- the liquid properties (particularly fluidity) when prepared as a coating liquid are further improved, and the uniformity of coating thickness and liquid-saving properties are further improved. can do. That is, when a film is formed using a coating liquid to which a coloring composition containing a fluorosurfactant is applied, the interfacial tension between the surface to be coated and the coating liquid is reduced, and the wettability to the surface to be coated is reduced. Is improved, and the coating property to the coated surface is improved. For this reason, it is possible to more suitably form a film having a uniform thickness with small thickness unevenness.
- the fluorine content in the fluorosurfactant is preferably 3 to 40% by mass, more preferably 5 to 30% by mass, and particularly preferably 7 to 25% by mass.
- a fluorine-based surfactant having a fluorine content within this range is effective in terms of uniformity of coating film thickness and liquid-saving properties, and has good solubility in the composition.
- fluorosurfactant examples include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, RS-72-K (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC -101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, K393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above, the product made by OMNOVA) etc.
- the fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group or propyleneoxy group) (meta).
- a fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used, and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactant used in the present invention.
- the weight average molecular weight of the above compound is preferably 3,000 to 50,000, for example, 14,000.
- As the fluorosurfactant a fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and paragraphs 0289 to 0295, such as MegaFac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC.
- nonionic surfactants include glycerol, trimethylolpropane, trimethylolethane and ethoxylates and propoxylates thereof (for example, glycerol propoxylate, glycerol ethoxylate, etc.), polyoxyethylene lauryl ether, polyoxyethylene Stearyl ether, polyoxyethylene oleyl ether, polyoxyethylene octylphenyl ether, polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether, polyethylene glycol dilaurate, polyethylene glycol distearate, sorbitan fatty acid ester (Pluronic L10, L31, L61, L62 manufactured by BASF, 10R5, 17R2, 25R2, Tetronic 304, 701, 704, 901, 904, 150R1, Rusperse 20000 (manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd.), etc. Also, NCW-101, NCW-1001, NCW-1002, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.
- cationic surfactant examples include phthalocyanine derivatives (trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.), organosiloxane polymer KP341 (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.), W001 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.) and the like.
- phthalocyanine derivatives trade name: EFKA-745, manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd.
- organosiloxane polymer KP341 manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.
- (meth) acrylic acid ( Co) polymer polyflow no. 75, no. 90, no. 95 manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.
- W001 manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.
- anionic surfactant examples include W004, W005, W017 (manufactured by Yusho Co., Ltd.), Sandet BL (manufactured by Sanyo Kasei Co., Ltd.), and the like.
- silicone-based surfactants include Torre Silicone DC3PA, Torre Silicone SH7PA, Torre Silicone DC11PA, Torresilicone SH21PA, Torree Silicone SH28PA, Torree Silicone SH29PA, Torree Silicone SH30PA, Torree Silicone SH8400 (above, Toray Dow Corning Co., Ltd.) )), TSF-4440, TSF-4300, TSF-4445, TSF-4460, TSF-4442 (above, manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials), KP341, KF6001, KF6002 (above, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Silicone Co., Ltd.) , BYK307, BYK323, BYK330 (above, manufactured by BYK Chemie) and the like.
- the content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent.
- silane coupling agent silane compounds having at least two types of functional groups having different reactivity in one molecule are also preferable, and those having an amino group and an alkoxy group as functional groups are particularly preferable.
- silane coupling agents examples include N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyl-methyldimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ - Aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N- ⁇ -aminoethyl- ⁇ -aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), ⁇ -Aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-903, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), ⁇ -aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name: KBE-903, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxy Si
- the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 0.001 to 20% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition, 0.01 to 10% by mass is more preferable, and 0.1% by mass to 5% by mass is particularly preferable.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of silane coupling agent, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- the coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor.
- Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, primary cerium salt, etc.) and the like.
- the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
- additives for example, fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents, and the like can be blended with the colored composition of the present invention as necessary.
- additives include those described in JP-A No. 2004-295116, paragraphs 0155 to 0156, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
- the antioxidant for example, a phenol compound, a phosphorus compound (for example, a compound described in paragraph No. 2011-90147 paragraph), a thioether compound, or the like can be used.
- the coloring composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
- the colored composition may contain a metal element, but from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of defects, the content of Group 2 elements (calcium, magnesium, etc.) in the colored composition is 50 ppm or less. It is preferable to control to 0.01 to 10 ppm.
- the total amount of the inorganic metal salt in the coloring composition is preferably 100 ppm or less, and more preferably controlled to 0.5 to 50 ppm.
- the coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned components. There are no particular restrictions on the order of injection and working conditions when blending.
- the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component is suitably used as two or more solutions or dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be prepared by mixing them.
- any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration.
- fluororesin such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resin such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight)
- PP polypropylene
- polypropylene including high density polypropylene
- nylon are preferable.
- the pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.01 to 7.0 ⁇ m, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 ⁇ m, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 ⁇ m. By setting it within this range, it becomes possible to reliably remove fine foreign matters that hinder the preparation of a uniform composition and the formation of a smooth film in the subsequent steps. Further, it is also preferable to use a fiber-shaped filter medium, and examples of the filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber, and the like. , TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003 etc.) filter cartridges can be used.
- the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
- the pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer.
- a commercially available filter for example, selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Integris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nihon Microlith Co., Ltd.) can do.
- the second filter a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
- the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
- the dye multimer of the present invention is a dye multimer having a dye structure represented by the above formula (I-1) or formula (I-2).
- the details of the formula (I-1) and the formula (I-2) are the same as those described in the above-described coloring composition.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50000.
- the lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 6000 or more.
- the upper limit is more preferably 30000 or less, and still more preferably 20000 or less.
- the ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 2.0, and 1.1 to 1. 8 is more preferable, and 1.1 to 1.5 is particularly preferable.
- dye multimer is a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement, Specifically, the value measured by the method as described in the Example mentioned later. It is.
- the acid value of the dye multimer is preferably 10 mgKOH / g or more, more preferably 20 mgKOH / g or more, further preferably 27 mgKOH / g or more, and particularly preferably 30 mgKOH / g or more.
- the upper limit of the acid value is preferably 300 mgKOH / g or less, more preferably 200 mgKOH / g or less, further preferably 180 mgKOH / g or less, still more preferably 130 mgKOH / g or less, and still more preferably 120 mgKOH / g or less.
- the curable group value of the dye multimer is preferably 0.1 mmol / g or more, more preferably 0.2 mmol / g or more, and still more preferably 0.3 mmol / g or more.
- the upper limit of the curable group value is not particularly limited, but for example, 2.0 mmol / g is preferable, and 1.5 mmol / g is more preferable.
- the curable group value can be calculated by dividing the number of curable groups introduced into the dye multimer by the molecular weight of the dye multimer. It can also be actually measured by analysis means such as 1 H-NMR (nuclear magnetic resonance).
- the dye multimer of the present invention can be used for applications such as color filters, inks (for inkjet, printing, etc.), paints, light-shielding films.
- the color filter of the present invention is formed using the above-described colored composition of the present invention.
- the color filter of the present invention can be used for solid-state imaging devices such as CCD (charge coupled device) and CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor), image display devices, and the like.
- the film thickness of the colored pattern (colored pixel) in the color filter of the present invention is preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.7 ⁇ m or less.
- the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
- the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 ⁇ m or less.
- the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
- the pattern forming method of the present invention includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and a pattern is formed on the colored composition layer by a photolithography method or a dry etching method. And a step of performing.
- Pattern formation by the photolithography method includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using a colored composition, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and developing and removing an unexposed portion. Forming the step. If necessary, a step of baking the colored composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (post-bake step) may be provided.
- pattern formation by the dry etching method includes forming a colored composition layer on a support using a colored composition and curing to form a cured product layer, and forming a photoresist layer on the cured product layer.
- a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern and a step of forming a pattern by dry etching the cured product layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask.
- Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer In the step of forming the curable composition layer, the colored composition layer is formed on the support using the colored composition.
- a solid-state image sensor substrate in which a solid-state image sensor (light receiving element) such as a CCD or CMOS is provided on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate) can be used.
- the pattern in the present invention may be formed on the solid-state image sensor formation surface side (front surface) of the solid-state image sensor substrate, or may be formed on the solid-state image sensor non-formation surface side (back surface).
- an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
- various methods such as slit coating, ink jet method, spin coating, cast coating, roll coating, and screen printing can be used.
- the colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked).
- pre-baking may not be performed.
- the prebaking temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and further preferably 110 ° C. or lower.
- the lower limit may be 50 ° C. or higher, and may be 80 ° C. or higher.
- the prebake time is preferably 10 seconds to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Drying can be performed with a hot plate, oven, or the like.
- Exposure process When forming a pattern by photolithography, ⁇ Exposure process >> Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure process).
- pattern exposure can be performed by exposing the coloring composition layer through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, an exposed part can be hardened.
- radiation (light) that can be used for exposure ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are preferable (particularly preferably i-line).
- Irradiation dose (exposure dose) for example, preferably 0.03 ⁇ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ⁇ 1.0J / cm 2.
- the oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected.
- the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and can usually be selected from the range of 1000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (for example, 5000 W / m 2 , 15000 W / m 2 , 35000 W / m 2 ). .
- Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20000W / m 2.
- the thickness of the cured film is preferably 2.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 1.0 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.7 ⁇ m or less.
- the lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 ⁇ m or more, and can also be 0.2 ⁇ m or more.
- the unexposed portion is developed and removed to form a pattern.
- the development removal of the unexposed portion can be performed using a developer.
- the coloring composition layer of the unexposed part in an exposure process elutes in a developing solution, and only the photocured part remains.
- the developer an organic alkali developer that does not damage the underlying solid-state imaging device or circuit is desirable.
- the temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example.
- the development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds.
- the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
- an alkaline aqueous solution obtained by diluting these alkaline agents with pure water is preferably used.
- the concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
- the inorganic alkali for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate and the like are preferable.
- a surfactant may be used for the developer. Examples of the surfactant include the surfactant described in the above-described curable composition, and a nonionic surfactant is preferable.
- clean (rinse) with a pure water after image development.
- Post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete film curing.
- the post-baking temperature is preferably 100 to 240 ° C., for example. From the viewpoint of film curing, 200 to 230 ° C. is more preferable.
- the post-bake temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. Preferably, 100 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 90 ° C. or lower is particularly preferable.
- the colored composition layer formed on the support is cured to form a cured product layer, and then a patterned photoresist layer is formed on the obtained cured product layer.
- Etching with an etching gas using the photoresist layer as a mask can be used.
- a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable.
- a positive radiation sensitive composition sensitive to radiation such as ultraviolet rays (g-rays, h-rays, i-rays), excimer lasers, deep ultraviolet rays, electron beams, ion beams and X-rays. Is preferably used. Of the radiation, g-line, h-line and i-line are preferable, and i-line is particularly preferable.
- the positive radiation sensitive composition a composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin is preferable.
- a positive radiation-sensitive composition containing a quinonediazide compound and an alkali-soluble resin indicates that a quinonediazide group is decomposed by irradiation with light having a wavelength of 500 nm or less to produce a carboxyl group, resulting in alkali-solubility from an alkali-insoluble state. It is what you use. Since this positive photoresist has remarkably excellent resolving power, it is used for manufacturing integrated circuits such as IC (integrated circuit) and LSI (Large Scale Integration). Examples of the quinonediazide compound include a naphthoquinonediazide compound. As a commercial item, "FHi622BC" (made by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials) etc. are mentioned, for example.
- the thickness of the photoresist layer is preferably from 0.1 to 3 ⁇ m, more preferably from 0.2 to 2.5 ⁇ m, still more preferably from 0.3 to 2 ⁇ m.
- the application method of a positive type radiation sensitive composition can be suitably performed using the application
- the photoresist layer is exposed and developed to form a resist pattern (patterned photoresist layer) provided with resist through-hole groups.
- the formation of the resist pattern is not particularly limited, and can be performed by appropriately optimizing a conventionally known photolithography technique.
- a resist through hole group in the photoresist layer By providing a resist through hole group in the photoresist layer by exposure and development, a resist pattern as an etching mask used in the next etching is provided on the cured product layer.
- the exposure of the photoresist layer is performed by exposing the positive-type or negative-type radiation-sensitive composition with g-line, h-line, i-line, etc., preferably i-line, through a predetermined mask pattern. Can do. After the exposure, the photoresist is removed in accordance with a region where a colored pattern is to be formed by developing with a developer.
- Any developer can be used as long as it does not affect the cured product layer and dissolves the exposed portion of the positive resist and the uncured portion of the negative resist.
- a combination of various solvents or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used.
- an alkaline aqueous solution prepared by dissolving an alkaline compound so as to have a concentration of 0.001 to 10% by mass, preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass is suitable.
- alkaline compounds include sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium oxalate, sodium metasuccinate, aqueous ammonia, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, choline, Examples include pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo [5.4.0] -7-undecene. When an alkaline aqueous solution is used, a washing treatment with water is generally performed after development.
- patterning is performed by dry etching so that a through hole group is formed in the cured product layer.
- Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
- (1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
- (2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
- (3) The first-stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above.
- the second-stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
- (5) The overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4) described above, and overetching is performed.
- the mixed gas used in the first-stage etching process preferably contains a fluorine-based gas and an oxygen gas (O 2 ) from the viewpoint of processing the organic material that is the film to be etched into a rectangular shape. Further, in the first stage etching process, damage to the support can be avoided by etching to a region where the support is not exposed. Further, in the second stage etching process and the over etching process, after the etching is performed up to the region where the support is not exposed by the mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas in the first stage etching process, damage to the support is avoided. From the viewpoint, it is preferable to perform the etching process using a mixed gas of nitrogen gas and oxygen gas.
- the ratio between the etching amount in the first stage etching process and the etching amount in the second stage etching process so as not to impair the rectangularity due to the etching process in the first stage etching process. It is.
- the latter ratio in the total etching amount (the sum of the etching amount in the first-stage etching process and the etching amount in the second-stage etching process) is preferably in the range of more than 0% and 50% or less, 10 to 20% is more preferable.
- the etching amount is an amount calculated from the difference between the remaining film thickness to be etched and the film thickness before etching.
- the etching preferably includes an over-etching process.
- the overetching process is preferably performed by setting an overetching ratio. Moreover, it is preferable to calculate the overetching ratio from the etching process time to be performed first.
- the over-etching ratio can be arbitrarily set, but it is preferably 30% or less of the etching processing time in the etching process, and preferably 5 to 25% from the viewpoint of etching resistance of the photoresist and maintaining the rectangularity of the pattern to be etched. Is more preferable, and 10 to 15% is particularly preferable.
- the resist pattern that is, the etching mask
- the removal of the resist pattern preferably includes a step of applying a stripping solution or a solvent on the resist pattern so that the resist pattern can be removed, and a step of removing the resist pattern using cleaning water.
- Examples of the step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on the resist pattern so that the resist pattern can be removed include, for example, a step of applying a stripping solution or solvent on at least the resist pattern and stagnating for a predetermined time to perform paddle development Can be mentioned.
- time to make stripping solution or a solvent stagnant It is preferable that it is several dozen seconds to several minutes.
- examples of the step of removing the resist pattern using the cleaning water include a step of removing the resist pattern by spraying the cleaning water onto the resist pattern from a spray type or shower type spray nozzle.
- the washing water pure water can be preferably used.
- examples of the injection nozzle include an injection nozzle in which the entire support is included in the injection range, and an injection nozzle that is a movable injection nozzle and in which the movable range includes the entire support. When the spray nozzle is movable, the resist pattern is more effectively removed by moving the support pattern from the center of the support to the end of the support more than twice during the process of removing the resist pattern and spraying the cleaning water. be able to.
- the stripping solution generally contains an organic solvent, but may further contain an inorganic solvent.
- organic solvents include 1) hydrocarbon compounds, 2) halogenated hydrocarbon compounds, 3) alcohol compounds, 4) ether or acetal compounds, 5) ketones or aldehyde compounds, and 6) ester compounds.
- the stripping solution preferably contains a nitrogen-containing compound, and more preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
- the acyclic nitrogen-containing compound is preferably an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound having a hydroxyl group.
- Specific examples include monoisopropanolamine, diisopropanolamine, triisopropanolamine, N-ethylethanolamine, N, N-dibutylethanolamine, N-butylethanolamine, monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine.
- Preferred are monoethanolamine, diethanolamine and triethanolamine, and more preferred is monoethanolamine (H 2 NCH 2 CH 2 OH).
- cyclic nitrogen-containing compounds include isoquinoline, imidazole, N-ethylmorpholine, ⁇ -caprolactam, quinoline, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, ⁇ -picoline, 2- Preferred examples include pipecoline, 3-pipecoline, 4-pipecoline, piperazine, piperidine, pyrazine, pyridine, pyrrolidine, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-phenylmorpholine, 2,4-lutidine, and 2,6-lutidine.
- NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
- NMP N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone
- the stripping solution preferably contains an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound.
- acyclic nitrogen-containing compound at least one selected from monoethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine, and cyclic
- the nitrogen-containing compound preferably includes at least one selected from N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and N-ethylmorpholine, and more preferably includes monoethanolamine and N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone.
- a deposit means an etching product deposited and deposited on the side wall of a cured product layer.
- the content of the non-cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 9 parts by weight or more and 11 parts by weight or less with respect to 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution, and the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing compound is 100 parts by weight of the stripping solution. On the other hand, what is 65 to 70 mass parts is desirable. Further, the stripping solution is preferably obtained by diluting a mixture of an acyclic nitrogen-containing compound and a cyclic nitrogen-containing compound with pure water.
- the solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the color filter of the present invention.
- the configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a configuration provided with the color filter in the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. .
- a transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support.
- a configuration having a light condensing means for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter
- a structure having the light condensing means on the color filter Etc for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter
- the color filter of the present invention can be used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic electroluminescence display device.
- the image display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image having a good display color and excellent display characteristics.
- display devices and details of each display device refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Devices (Akio Sasaki, published by Industrial Research Institute 1990)”, “Display Devices (Junaki Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year).
- the liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Kenkyukai 1994)”.
- the liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
- the color filter of the present invention may be used in a color TFT (Thin Film Transistor) type liquid crystal display device.
- the color TFT liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Color TFT liquid crystal display (issued in 1996 by Kyoritsu Publishing Co., Ltd.)”.
- the present invention provides a liquid crystal display device with a wide viewing angle, such as a horizontal electric field driving method such as IPS (In Plane Switching), a pixel division method such as MVA (Multi-domain Vertical Alignment), and a STN (Super-Twist Nematic).
- IPS In Plane Switching
- MVA Multi-domain Vertical Alignment
- STN Super-Twist Nematic
- the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle compensation film.
- the color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members.
- these components for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
- backlights SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et al.), Monthly Display December 2005, 18-24 pages (Yasuhiro Shima), 25-30 pages (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
- Intermediate d was obtained in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1 except that p-chloromethylstyrene was changed to ethyl iodide.
- Intermediate c was synthesized in the same manner as in the method described in paragraph 0372 of JP-A-2015-30742. 11.2 g of intermediate c and 10.0 g of intermediate d were stirred in 200 mL of methylene chloride at room temperature for 2 hours. Next, 100 mL of water was added for liquid separation. The oil layer was concentrated and purified by column chromatography using silica gel to obtain 15.5 g of a dye monomer (X-2).
- Dye monomer (X-1) (16.4 g), methacrylic acid (3.00 g), dodecyl mercaptan (0.51 g), propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate (hereinafter also referred to as “PGMEA”) (46.6 g) was mixed and half was added to a three neck flask and heated to 80 ° C. under a nitrogen atmosphere. To the remaining liquid, 2,2′-azobis (isobutyric acid) dimethyl (trade name: V601, manufactured by Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) (0.58 g) was added and dissolved, and dropped into a three-necked flask over 2 hours. did.
- PGMEA propylene glycol 1-monomethyl ether 2-acetate
- Dye multimer (S-2) A dye multimer (S-2) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 8 except that the dye monomer (X-1) was changed to the dye multimer (X-2).
- Dye multimer (S-5) A dye multimer (S-5) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 8 except that the dye monomer (X-1) was changed to the dye multimer (X-6).
- Synthesis Example 14 Synthesis of dye multimer (S-7) 11.9 g (24.7 mmol) of compound (X-7) and 2.7 g (12.4 mmol) of pyromellitic anhydride were added to 50 g of PGMEA and heated to reflux for 10 hours under a nitrogen atmosphere. After cooling to room temperature, the solid obtained by adding to 1000 mL of hexane was filtered and air-dried at 40 ° C. for 2 days to obtain 17.5 g of a dye multimer (S-7).
- This solution was added dropwise to 5 g of N-methylpyrrolidone heated at 80 ° C. in a nitrogen atmosphere over 1 hour, stirred for 3 hours, and then allowed to cool. To this, 2.0 g of diazabicycloundecene (DBU) was added, and after stirring for 12 hours, 2.0 g of methanesulfonic acid was added. The resulting solution was added dropwise to a solution of 250 mL methanol / 250 mL water. The obtained solid was filtered and dried to obtain 11.1 g of a dye multimer (S-8).
- DBU diazabicycloundecene
- MMA methacrylic acid
- GMA glycidyl methacrylate
- HMP 1,1-bis (hydroxymethyl) propionic acid
- GLM 2,3-dihydroxypropyl methacrylate
- PA pyromellitic anhydride
- MBMP 2- (2-bromo-2-methylpropanoyl) ethyl methacrylate.
- a silicon wafer having a diameter of 6 inches (1 inch 25.4 mm) was heat-treated in an oven at 200 ° C. for 30 minutes. Next, the undercoat resist solution is applied onto the silicon wafer so as to have a dry film thickness of 1.5 ⁇ m, and further heated and dried in an oven at 220 ° C. for 1 hour to form an undercoat layer. A silicon wafer substrate was obtained.
- Pigment dispersion 1 was prepared as follows.
- a pigment dispersion was prepared by mixing and dispersing for 3 hours using beads having a diameter of 0.3 mm.
- dispersion treatment was further performed at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism.
- This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a pigment dispersion 1 (pigment concentration 13%).
- the particle size of the pigment was measured by a dynamic light scattering method (Microtrac Nanotrac UPA-EX150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.)) to be 24 nm.
- Pigment Dispersion 2 In pigment dispersion 1, C.I. I. In place of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment dispersion 2 was prepared in the same manner as pigment dispersion 1, except that Pigment Red 254 was used. The particle size of Pigment Dispersion Liquid 2 was 26 nm.
- pigment dispersion 3 In pigment dispersion 1, C.I. I. In place of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment dispersion 3 was prepared in the same manner as pigment dispersion 1, except that CI Pigment Green 58 was used. The particle size of Pigment Dispersion Liquid 3 was 29 nm.
- pigment dispersion 4 In pigment dispersion 1, C.I. I. In place of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment dispersion 4 was prepared in the same manner as pigment dispersion 1, except that CI Pigment Green 59 was used. The particle size of the pigment dispersion 4 was 24 nm.
- ⁇ Preparation of coloring composition> The following components were mixed, dispersed, dissolved, and filtered through a 0.45 ⁇ m nylon filter to obtain a colored composition.
- -composition- -Dye compound described in the following table: 0.040 parts as a solid content-Pigment dispersion containing the pigment described in the following table (pigment concentration: 13.0%): 0.615 parts-Cyclohexanone: 100 parts-Alkali Soluble resin (the following J1 or J2: compounds described in the following table): 5 parts Solsperse 20000 (1% cyclohexane solution, manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol): 1 part Photopolymerization initiator (the following (I-1) to (I -8): Compounds described in the following table): 1 part curable compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku)): 10 parts glycerol propoxylate (
- Photopolymerization initiator structure shown below.
- the following (I-1) is IRGACURE (registered trademark) -OXE01
- (I-2) is IRGACURE (registered trademark) -OXE02 (manufactured by BASF)
- (I-3) is IRGACURE (registered trademark) -379
- (I- 4) is DAROCUR (registered trademark) -TPO (all of which are manufactured by BASF).
- Ph represents a phenyl group.
- Alkali-soluble resin the following structure
- composition layer (coating film).
- the coating amount of the coloring composition was set to a coating amount at which the dry film thickness was 0.6 ⁇ m.
- this coating film was heat-treated (pre-baked) for 120 seconds using a hot plate at 100 ° C.
- the substrate after pre-baking was allowed to stand at room temperature for 24 hours (aging).
- the substrate on which the colored pattern is formed is fixed to the horizontal rotary table by a vacuum chuck method, and pure water is showered from the spray nozzle from above the rotation center while rotating the silicon wafer substrate at a rotation speed of 50 rpm by a rotating device.
- the product was supplied in the form of a rinse, followed by spin drying. As described above, a color filter having a colored pattern was produced.
- the size of the colored pattern was measured using a measuring SEM (scanning electron microscope) “S-9260A” (manufactured by Hitachi High-Technologies). The exposure amount at which the pattern size was 1.0 ⁇ m was determined as the optimum exposure amount.
- the luminance distribution was measured using an image obtained by photographing the sample with a microscope MX-50 (Olympus).
- the luminance with the largest number of pixels is defined as the average luminance.
- the ratio (%) of pixels whose deviation from the average is within ⁇ 5% is described.
- ⁇ Pattern shape> The pattern shape of the obtained color filter was observed with SEM (scanning electron microscope). A: No pattern distortion or surface roughness. B: The pattern is distorted and the surface is rough.
- Each coloring composition was apply
- the coating amount of the coloring composition was set to a coating amount at which the dry film thickness was 0.6 ⁇ m.
- this coating film was heat-treated (pre-baked) for 120 seconds using a hot plate at 100 ° C. After standing the substrate at room temperature for 24 hours (with time) was measured and the number of defects (number / cm 2) at Applied Materials Inc. ComPlus. The smaller the number of defects, the better.
- the occurrence of color unevenness and defects was suppressed even after aging after pre-baking. Furthermore, the pattern shape was good and there were few pattern defects. On the other hand, the comparative example was inferior in color unevenness and defects. Furthermore, the pattern shape was inferior and there were many pattern defects.
- PG36 in the above table is C.I. I. It is an abbreviation for Pigment Green 36.
- PG254 is a C.I. I. It is an abbreviation for Pigment Red 254.
- PG58 is C.I. I. It is an abbreviation for Pigment Green 58.
- PG59 is C.I. I. It is an abbreviation for Pigment Green 59.
- the said coloring composition was apply
- a positive photoresist “FHi622BC” manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials was applied on the cured film and prebaked to form a photoresist layer having a thickness of 0.8 ⁇ m.
- the photoresist layer is subjected to pattern exposure using an i-line stepper (manufactured by Canon) at an exposure amount of 350 mJ / cm 2 , and heat treatment is performed for 1 minute at a temperature at which the temperature of the photoresist layer or the atmospheric temperature becomes 90 ° C. Was done.
- a resist stripping process was performed for 120 seconds using a photoresist stripping solution “MS230C” (manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials) to remove the resist pattern, and further cleaning with pure water and spin drying were performed.
- a dehydration baking process was performed at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
- dry etching was performed according to the following procedure.
- RF power 800 W
- antenna bias 400 W
- wafer bias 200 W
- chamber internal pressure 4.0 Pa
- substrate temperature 50 ° C.
- mixed gas using dry etching equipment Hitachi High Technologies, U-621 Seed and flow rate were CF 4 : 80 mL / min.
- O 2 40 mL / min.
- Ar 800 mL / min.
- the first stage etching process of 80 seconds was performed.
- RF (radio frequency) power 600 W
- antenna bias 100 W
- wafer bias 250 W
- chamber internal pressure 2.0 Pa
- substrate temperature 50 ° C.
- mixed gas type and flow rate N 2 : 500 mL / min.
- O 2 50 mL / min.
- a second-stage etching process and an over-etching process were performed for 28 seconds.
- the resist is removed by using a photoresist stripping solution “MS230C” (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials) for 120 seconds to remove the resist, followed by washing with pure water, spin Drying was performed. Thereafter, a dehydration baking process was performed at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
- the occurrence of color unevenness and defects was suppressed even after aging after pre-baking. Furthermore, the pattern shape was good and there were few pattern defects. On the other hand, the comparative example was inferior in color unevenness and defects. Furthermore, the pattern shape was inferior and there were many pattern defects.
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Polymers & Plastics (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Chemical Kinetics & Catalysis (AREA)
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Spectroscopy & Molecular Physics (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Materials For Photolithography (AREA)
- Optical Filters (AREA)
- Polymerisation Methods In General (AREA)
Abstract
Description
また、特許文献6には、色素多量体を含む着色組成物を用いてカラーフィルタを製造することが記載されている。 For example, Patent Documents 1 to 5 have yellow structures having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms is a nitrogen atom. It describes that a color filter or the like is produced using a dye.
Patent Document 6 describes that a color filter is produced using a coloring composition containing a dye multimer.
しかしながら、本発明者らの検討によれば、特許文献1~5に記載された黄色染料を用いた着色組成物を支持体などに適用し、乾燥した状態の膜(未硬化の膜)を長時間引き置きしたのち、硬化処理を行って硬化膜を製造すると、得られる硬化膜に色ムラや欠陥などが生じやすいことが分かった。上記膜の引き置きを長くするほど、得られる硬化膜に欠陥や色ムラが生じやすかった。これは、特許文献1~5に記載された黄色染料は、極性が高いため、着色組成物中の他の成分(硬化性化合物、樹脂、溶剤など)との相溶性が経時で低下しやすく、そのため、引き置き時に、黄色染料と、他の成分とで相分離が生じたり、黄色染料の凝集などが生じて、硬化膜に欠陥や、色ムラが生じやすくなったと推測する。
なお、特許文献6には、引き置きに伴う、欠陥や色ムラに関する検討については記載されていない。 Here, in the case of forming a cured film or a pattern using the colored composition as described in Patent Documents 1 to 6, the colored composition is applied to a support and dried, and after a while Then, a cured film may be produced by performing exposure or the like.
However, according to the study by the present inventors, a coloring composition using a yellow dye described in Patent Documents 1 to 5 is applied to a support and the like, and a dried film (uncured film) is long. It was found that when the cured film was manufactured by performing the curing process after leaving the time, color unevenness and defects were likely to occur in the obtained cured film. As the retention of the film was made longer, defects and color unevenness were more likely to occur in the resulting cured film. This is because the yellow dyes described in Patent Documents 1 to 5 have high polarity, so the compatibility with other components (curable compounds, resins, solvents, etc.) in the colored composition tends to decrease over time, For this reason, it is presumed that phase separation occurs between the yellow dye and the other components or aggregation of the yellow dye occurs during the leaving, and defects and color unevenness are likely to occur in the cured film.
Note that Patent Document 6 does not describe a study on defects and color unevenness associated with the holding.
<1> 色素多量体と、硬化性化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
色素多量体は、2以上のヘテロ原子を含み、かつ、ヘテロ原子の1以上が窒素原子であるカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素構造を含む、着色組成物。
<2> カチオン性ヘテロ環が、下記式(I)で表わされる、<1>に記載の着色組成物;
式(I)
<3> 色素構造は、式(Ia)で表される、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物;
Lは、-N=N-、または、アリーレン基を表し、
Bは、置換基を表し、
Xはアニオンを表し、
Ht、BおよびXの少なくとも一つが色素多量体を構成する原子団との結合部位を有する。
<4> 色素多量体は、式(I-1)で表される色素構造を有する、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物;
<5> 色素多量体は、式(I-2)で表される色素構造を有する、<1>または<2>に記載の着色組成物;
<6> 色素多量体は、下記式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、及び、下記式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の少なくとも一つを含んでなるか、又は下記式(D)で表される、<1>~<5>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物;
<7> 色素多量体は、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンまたはトリス(スルホニル)メチルアニオンを有する、<1>~<6>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<8> さらに、顔料を含有する、<1>~<7>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<9> 硬化性化合物が、ラジカル重合性化合物を含み、更に光重合開始剤を含有する、<1>~<8>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<10> 更に、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含む、<1>~<9>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物。
<11> <1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ。
<12> <1>~<10>のいずれかに記載の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法またはドライエッチング法により、着色組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程と、を有するパターン形成方法。
<13> <11>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。
<14> <11>に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。
<15> 下記式(I-1)または式(I-2)で表される色素構造を有する色素多量体;
<1> A coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound,
The dye multimer includes a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom. Composition.
<2> The colored composition according to <1>, wherein the cationic heterocycle is represented by the following formula (I);
Formula (I)
<3> The coloring composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the dye structure is represented by the formula (Ia);
L represents -N = N- or an arylene group,
B represents a substituent,
X represents an anion,
At least one of Ht, B, and X has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer.
<4> The coloring composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the dye multimer has a dye structure represented by formula (I-1);
<5> The coloring composition according to <1> or <2>, wherein the dye multimer has a dye structure represented by formula (I-2);
<6> The dye multimer includes at least one of a repeating unit represented by the following formula (A) and a repeating unit represented by the following formula (C), or represented by the following formula (D). The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <5>,
<7> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <6>, wherein the dye multimer has a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion.
<8> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <7>, further containing a pigment.
<9> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <8>, wherein the curable compound contains a radical polymerizable compound and further contains a photopolymerization initiator.
<10> The colored composition according to any one of <1> to <9>, further comprising an alkali-soluble resin.
<11> A color filter using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <10>.
<12> A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of <1> to <10>, and a photolithography method or a dry etching method to form a colored composition layer. Forming a pattern with respect to the pattern.
<13> A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to <11>.
<14> An image display device having the color filter according to <11>.
<15> A dye multimer having a dye structure represented by the following formula (I-1) or formula (I-2);
本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換および無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば、「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
本明細書において光とは、活性光線または放射線を意味する。また、「活性光線」または「放射線」とは、例えば、水銀灯の輝線スペクトル、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、極紫外線(EUV光)、X線、電子線等を意味する。
本明細書において「露光」とは、特に断らない限り、水銀灯、エキシマレーザーに代表される遠紫外線、X線、EUV光などによる露光のみならず、電子線、イオンビーム等の粒子線による描画も露光に含める。
本明細書において「~」を用いて表される数値範囲は、「~」の前後に記載される数値を下限値および上限値として含む範囲を意味する。
本明細書において、全固形分とは、着色組成物の全成分から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。
本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリレート」は、アクリレートおよびメタクリレートの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリルおよびメタクリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アリル」は、アリルおよびメタリルの双方、または、いずれかを表し、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイルおよびメタクリロイルの双方、または、いずれかを表す。
本明細書において「工程」との語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であってもその工程の所期の作用が達成されれば、本用語に含まれる。
本明細書において、重量平均分子量(Mw)および数平均分子量(Mn)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)測定によるポリスチレン換算値として定義される。 Hereinafter, the contents of the present invention will be described in detail.
In the description of the group (atomic group) in this specification, the description which does not describe substitution and non-substitution includes what does not have a substituent and what has a substituent. For example, the “alkyl group” includes not only an alkyl group having no substituent (unsubstituted alkyl group) but also an alkyl group having a substituent (substituted alkyl group).
In this specification, light means actinic rays or radiation. “Actinic light” or “radiation” means, for example, an emission line spectrum of a mercury lamp, far ultraviolet rays represented by excimer laser, extreme ultraviolet rays (EUV light), X-rays, electron beams, and the like.
In this specification, “exposure” means not only exposure with far ultraviolet rays such as mercury lamps and excimer lasers, X-rays, EUV light, etc., but also drawing with electron beams, ion beams, etc. unless otherwise specified. Include in exposure.
In this specification, a numerical range expressed using “to” means a range including numerical values described before and after “to” as a lower limit value and an upper limit value.
In this specification, the total solid content refers to the total mass of components obtained by removing the solvent from all components of the colored composition.
In this specification, “(meth) acrylate” represents both and / or acrylate and methacrylate, and “(meth) acryl” represents both and / or acrylic and “(meth) acrylic”. ") Allyl" represents both and / or allyl and methallyl, and "(meth) acryloyl" represents both and / or acryloyl and methacryloyl.
In this specification, the term “process” is not limited to an independent process, and is included in the term if the intended action of the process is achieved even when it cannot be clearly distinguished from other processes. .
In this specification, a weight average molecular weight (Mw) and a number average molecular weight (Mn) are defined as a polystyrene conversion value by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement.
本発明の着色組成物は、色素多量体と、硬化性化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、色素多量体は、2以上のヘテロ原子を含み、かつ、ヘテロ原子の1以上が窒素原子であるカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素構造を含む。
上記構成とすることにより、着色組成物を支持体などに適用し、乾燥した状態の膜(未硬化の膜)を長時間引き置きしたのち、硬化しても、欠陥や色ムラなどの少ない、硬化膜を製造することができる。さらには、上記の未硬化の膜を長時間引き置きした後、パターン形成しても、色ムラ、欠陥およびパターン表面の荒れが少なく、パターン欠陥の抑制されたパターンを得ることもできる。
このような効果が得られる理由については、以下によるものと推測する。まず、2以上のヘテロ原子を含み、かつ、ヘテロ原子の1以上が窒素原子であるカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素化合物は、極性が高いものが多い。特に、カチオン性ヘテロ環として、非対称性の五員環構造を有する色素化合物は、対称性の高いキサンテン、トリアリールメタン、シアニン等と比較して極性は非常に高い。一方、着色組成物に用いる硬化性化合物などは、低極性であるものが多い。このため、このような極性の高い色素化合物は、硬化性化合物などの着色組成物中の他の成分と相溶しにくいと考えられる。また、1分子に1つの色素構造を有する色素化合物は、未硬化の膜中で移動しやすいため、双極子の相互作用により、引き置き時に、相分離などが生じたり、色素化合物が凝集して、欠陥や色ムラなどが生じやすくなっていたと推測する。これに対し、本発明では、上述のカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素化合物を多量体化して、上述のカチオン性ヘテロ環を有する色素構造を含む色素多量体とすることで、膜中で色素多量体の移動を抑制できたと推測する。さらには、色素多量体とすることにより、分子量が大きくなるため、単分子の色素化合物の場合に比べて極性が小さくなり、膜中の他の成分との相溶性が低下しにくくなったと推測する。そのため、本発明によれば、着色組成物を支持体などに適用し、乾燥した状態の膜(未硬化の膜)を長時間引き置きしたのち、硬化しても、引き置き時における相分離や凝集を抑制でき、その結果、色ムラおよび欠陥の抑制された硬化膜を製造できたと推測する。さらには、引き置き時における相分離や凝集を抑制できるため、引き置き後も、膜の硬化を均一に行うことができる。そのため、上記の未硬化の膜を長時間引き置きした後、パターン形成しても、色ムラ、欠陥およびパターン表面の荒れが少なく、パターン欠陥の抑制されたパターンを得ることもできる。
以下、本発明の着色組成物について詳細に説明する。 <Coloring composition>
The colored composition of the present invention is a colored composition containing a dye multimer and a curable compound, wherein the dye multimer contains two or more heteroatoms, and one or more of the heteroatoms are nitrogen atoms. A dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a certain cationic heterocycle is included.
By adopting the above-described configuration, the coloring composition is applied to a support and the like, and after leaving a dried film (uncured film) for a long time, even after curing, there are few defects and color unevenness, A cured film can be produced. Furthermore, even if a pattern is formed after leaving the above-mentioned uncured film for a long time, it is possible to obtain a pattern in which color unevenness, defects and pattern surface roughness are small and pattern defects are suppressed.
The reason why such an effect is obtained is presumed to be as follows. First, a dye compound having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom is highly polar. Many. In particular, a dye compound having an asymmetric five-membered ring structure as a cationic heterocycle has a very high polarity as compared with xanthene, triarylmethane, cyanine and the like having high symmetry. On the other hand, many of the curable compounds used in the colored composition have a low polarity. For this reason, it is considered that such a highly polar dye compound is hardly compatible with other components in the coloring composition such as a curable compound. In addition, since a dye compound having one dye structure per molecule is likely to move in an uncured film, phase separation or the like occurs due to the interaction of dipoles, or the dye compound aggregates due to dipole interaction. It is presumed that defects, color unevenness, etc. were likely to occur. In contrast, in the present invention, a dye having a dye structure having the above-described cationic heterocycle is obtained by multimerizing a dye compound having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to the above-described cationic heterocycle. It is presumed that the migration of the dye multimer in the film could be suppressed by using the multimer. Furthermore, since the molecular weight is increased by using the dye multimer, it is presumed that the polarity becomes smaller than that of a single-molecule dye compound, and the compatibility with other components in the film is less likely to be lowered. . Therefore, according to the present invention, the coloring composition is applied to a support or the like, and after the dried film (uncured film) is left for a long time and then cured, phase separation or Aggregation can be suppressed, and as a result, it is presumed that a cured film in which color unevenness and defects are suppressed can be produced. Furthermore, since phase separation and aggregation at the time of holding can be suppressed, the film can be uniformly cured even after holding. Therefore, even if a pattern is formed after leaving the above-mentioned uncured film for a long time, it is possible to obtain a pattern in which color unevenness, defects and pattern surface roughness are small and pattern defects are suppressed.
Hereinafter, the coloring composition of the present invention will be described in detail.
本発明の着色組成物は、2以上のヘテロ原子を含み、かつ、ヘテロ原子の1以上が窒素原子であるカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素構造を含む色素多量体を含む。なお、本発明において、色素多量体は、二量体、三量体およびポリマーなどの構造を包含する。また、色素構造の種類(カチオン性ヘテロ環が有する置換基の種類や、色素骨格の種類など)によっては、色素構造上のカチオンは非局在化している場合がある。本発明におけるカチオン性ヘテロ環は、カチオンが非局在化している状態も含む。 << Dye Multimer >>
The coloring composition of the present invention has a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom. Contains pigment multimers. In the present invention, the dye multimer includes structures such as a dimer, a trimer and a polymer. In addition, depending on the type of the dye structure (the type of substituent that the cationic heterocycle has, the type of the dye skeleton, etc.), the cation on the dye structure may be delocalized. The cationic heterocycle in the present invention includes a state where a cation is delocalized.
式(I)
Formula (I)
RaとRYa、RbとRYa、および、RbとRYbが結合して形成する環は、単環であってもよく、多環であってもよい。環は、芳香族環が好ましい。芳香族環としては、炭化水素芳香族環および複素芳香族環が挙げられる。炭化水素芳香族環としては、ベンゼン環、ナフタレン環、アントラセン環、フェナントレン環等が挙げられる。複素芳香族環としては、ピリジン環、ピラジン環、ピロール環、キノリン環、キノキサリン環、フラン環、ベンゾフラン環、チオフェン環、ベンゾチオフェン環、オキサゾール環、チアゾール環、イミダゾール環、ピラゾール環、インドール環、カルバゾール環などが挙げられる。芳香族環は、炭化水素芳香族環が好ましく、ベンゼン環がより好ましい。 Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples thereof include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
The ring formed by combining R a and R Ya , R b and R Ya , and R b and R Yb may be monocyclic or polycyclic. The ring is preferably an aromatic ring. Examples of the aromatic ring include a hydrocarbon aromatic ring and a heteroaromatic ring. Examples of the hydrocarbon aromatic ring include a benzene ring, a naphthalene ring, an anthracene ring, and a phenanthrene ring. Heteroaromatic rings include pyridine ring, pyrazine ring, pyrrole ring, quinoline ring, quinoxaline ring, furan ring, benzofuran ring, thiophene ring, benzothiophene ring, oxazole ring, thiazole ring, imidazole ring, pyrazole ring, indole ring, And a carbazole ring. The aromatic ring is preferably a hydrocarbon aromatic ring, and more preferably a benzene ring.
芳香族環基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基は、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。電子供与性基が好ましい。電子供与性基としては、Hammettのσp値が0.2以下の基が挙げられる。σp値として好ましくは0.1以下であり、より好ましくは0以下である。電子供与性基の具体例としては、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アミノ基、ウレア基、アリル基、ヒドロキシル基などが挙げられ、アミノ基が好ましい。これらの基は、電子供与性を失わない範囲でアルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヒドロキシル基、アルコキシ基、チオール基、チオアルコキシ基、アミノ基、ハロゲン原子等の置換基で置換されていてもよい。また、これらの置換基は、更にこれらの置換基で置換されていてもよく、また、可能であるなら互いに結合して環を形成していてもよい。 Examples of the aromatic ring group bonded to the cationic heterocycle include a hydrocarbon aromatic ring group and a heteroaromatic ring group. Examples of the hydrocarbon aromatic ring group include a benzene ring group, a naphthalene ring group, an anthracene ring group, and a phenanthrene ring group. Heteroaromatic ring groups include pyridine ring group, pyrazine ring group, pyrrole ring group, quinoline ring group, quinoxaline ring group, furan ring group, benzofuran ring group, thiophene ring group, benzothiophene ring group, oxazole ring group, thiazole Examples thereof include a ring group, an imidazole ring group, a pyrazole ring group, an indole ring group, and a carbazole ring group. The aromatic ring group is preferably a hydrocarbon aromatic ring group, and more preferably a benzene ring group.
The aromatic ring group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later. An electron donating group is preferred. Examples of the electron donating group include groups having a Hammett σp value of 0.2 or less. The σp value is preferably 0.1 or less, more preferably 0 or less. Specific examples of the electron donating group include an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an amino group, a urea group, an allyl group, and a hydroxyl group, and an amino group is preferable. These groups are substituted with substituents such as alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, hydroxyl groups, alkoxy groups, thiol groups, thioalkoxy groups, amino groups, halogen atoms and the like within a range not losing electron donating properties. It may be. Further, these substituents may be further substituted with these substituents, and if possible, may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
また、Lが、アリーレン基を表す場合、Bは、電子供与性基が好ましく、アミノ基がより好ましい。アミノ基は、ジアルキルアミノ基または環状アミノ基が好ましい。具体例としては、ジメチルアミノ基、ジエチルアミノ基、ピペリジノ基、モルホリノ基などが挙げられる。また、BはHtに対してパラ位に置換されていることが好ましい。
アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がさらに好ましく、6~10が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。
ヘテロ環基として、5~7員の置換もしくは無置換、飽和もしくは不飽和、芳香族もしくは非芳香族、単環もしくは縮環のヘテロ環基が好ましく、環構成原子が炭素原子と、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基がさらに好ましい。なかでも、炭素数3~30の5もしくは6員の芳香族のヘテロ環基が最も好ましい。ヘテロ環基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。ヘテロ環基として、例えば、2-フリル、2-チエニル、2-ピリジル、4-ピリジル、2-ピリミジニル、2-ベンゾチアゾリル、1-メチル―1H-インドール―3-イル、2-カルバゾイル等が挙げられる。なかでも、1-アルキル―1H-インドール―3-イルが好ましい。
アミノ基としては、-N(R110)(R111)で表される基が挙げられる。R110およびR111は、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基またはヘテロ環基を表す。水素原子、アルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロ環基については、上述した基が挙げられる。
R110およびR111の少なくとも一方は、アルキル基が好ましく、R110およびR111の両方がアルキル基であることがより好ましい。すなわち、アミノ基はジアルキルアミノ基がより好ましい。特に、Lが、アリーレン基を表す場合、R110およびR111の両方がアルキル基であることがより好ましい。
また、R110およびR111は結合して環を形成していることも好ましい。すなわち、アミノ基は環状アミノ基であることも好ましい。特に、R110およびR111の両方がアルキル基である場合、両者が結合して環を形成していることも好ましい。R110およびR111が結合して環を形成する場合、R110とR111は、-O-、-NH-、-CH2-およびそれらの組み合わせからなる群より選ばれる2価の連結基で連結して環を形成することが好ましい。2価の連結基は、-O-または-CH2-が好ましい。 In the formula (Ia), B represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include those mentioned in Substituent Group A described later, and an aryl group, a heterocyclic group and an amino group are preferred.
When L represents an arylene group, B is preferably an electron donating group, and more preferably an amino group. The amino group is preferably a dialkylamino group or a cyclic amino group. Specific examples include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a piperidino group, and a morpholino group. Further, B is preferably substituted at the para position with respect to Ht.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, and the ring-constituting atoms are a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of either an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable. Of these, a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms is most preferable. The heterocyclic group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples of the heterocyclic group include 2-furyl, 2-thienyl, 2-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 2-benzothiazolyl, 1-methyl-1H-indol-3-yl, 2-carbazoyl and the like. . Of these, 1-alkyl-1H-indol-3-yl is preferable.
Examples of the amino group include a group represented by —N (R 110 ) (R 111 ). R 110 and R 111 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. The group mentioned above is mentioned about a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
At least one of R 110 and R 111 alkyl group is preferable, and more preferably both by R 110 and R 111 is an alkyl group. That is, the amino group is more preferably a dialkylamino group. In particular, when L represents an arylene group, it is more preferable that both R 110 and R 111 are alkyl groups.
R 110 and R 111 are preferably bonded to form a ring. That is, the amino group is preferably a cyclic amino group. In particular, when both R 110 and R 111 are alkyl groups, it is also preferred that they are bonded to form a ring. When R 110 and R 111 are combined to form a ring, R 110 and R 111 are divalent linking groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —NH—, —CH 2 —, and combinations thereof. It is preferable to connect to form a ring. The divalent linking group is preferably —O— or —CH 2 —.
式(Ia-1)において、Yaは硫黄原子または-NRYa-を表し、Ybは窒素原子または-CRYb-を表し、Ra、RYaおよびRYbは、それぞれ独立に水素原子または置換基を表す。
Ra、RYaおよびRYbが表す置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた置換基が挙げられる。たとえば、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基などが挙げられる。
ハロゲン原子としては、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子が挙げられる。
アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、炭素数1~20がさらに好ましく、炭素数1~10が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐および環状が挙げられ、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。
アルケニル基の炭素数は、2~30が好ましく、2~20がさらに好ましく、2~10がより好ましい。アルケニル基は、直鎖、分岐および環状が挙げられ、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルケニル基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。
アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がさらに好ましく、6~10が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。
ヘテロ環基として、5~7員の置換もしくは無置換、飽和もしくは不飽和、芳香族もしくは非芳香族、単環もしくは縮環のヘテロ環基が好ましく、環構成原子が炭素原子と、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基がさらに好ましい。 L and B in the formula (Ia-1) are synonymous with L and B in the formula (Ia) described above.
In the formula (Ia-1), Y a represents a sulfur atom or —NR Ya —, Y b represents a nitrogen atom or —CR Yb —, and R a , R Ya and R Yb each independently represent a hydrogen atom or Represents a substituent.
Examples of the substituent represented by R a , R Ya and R Yb include the substituents exemplified in Substituent group A described later. Examples thereof include a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, an aryl group, and a heterocyclic group.
Examples of the halogen atom include a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, and an iodine atom.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable. The alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
The alkenyl group preferably has 2 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and still more preferably 2 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkenyl group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable. The alkenyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, and the ring-constituting atoms are a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of either an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
アルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、炭素数1~20がさらに好ましく、炭素数1~10が特に好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐および環状が挙げられ、直鎖または分岐が好ましい。アルキル基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。
アリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~20がさらに好ましく、6~10が特に好ましい。アリール基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、後述する置換基A群で挙げた基が挙げられる。
ヘテロ環基として、5~7員の置換もしくは無置換、飽和もしくは不飽和、芳香族もしくは非芳香族、単環もしくは縮環のヘテロ環基が好ましく、環構成原子が炭素原子と、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基がさらに好ましい。 In formula (I-1), R 1 and R 8 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group, and preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
The alkyl group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl group include straight chain, branched, and cyclic, and straight chain or branched is preferable. The alkyl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
The aryl group preferably has 6 to 30 carbon atoms, more preferably 6 to 20 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably 6 to 10 carbon atoms. The aryl group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include groups exemplified in Substituent group A described later.
The heterocyclic group is preferably a 5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group, and the ring-constituting atoms are a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of either an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom is more preferable.
R101は、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましい。
R110およびR111は、それぞれ独立に、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基が好ましく、水素原子またはアルキル基がより好ましく、アルキル基がさらに好ましい。R110およびR111が結合して環を形成する場合、R110とR111は、-O-、-NH-、-CH2-およびそれらの組み合わせからなる群より選ばれる2価の連結基で連結して環を形成することが好ましい。2価の連結基は、-O-または-CH2-が好ましい。
R101、R110およびR111が表すアルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロ環基は、式(I-1)のR1およびR8で説明したアルキル基、アリール基およびヘテロ環基と同義であり、好ましい範囲も同様である。 In formula (I-2), R 101 , R 110 and R 111 each independently represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocyclic group. R 110 and R 111 may combine to form a ring.
R 101 is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
R 110 and R 111 are each independently preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, and even more preferably an alkyl group. When R 110 and R 111 are combined to form a ring, R 110 and R 111 are divalent linking groups selected from the group consisting of —O—, —NH—, —CH 2 —, and combinations thereof. It is preferable to connect to form a ring. The divalent linking group is preferably —O— or —CH 2 —.
The alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group represented by R 101 , R 110 and R 111 have the same meanings as the alkyl group, aryl group and heterocyclic group described for R 1 and R 8 in formula (I-1), The preferable range is also the same.
Y1およびY2は、少なくとも一方が-SO2-を表すことが好ましく、いずれも-SO2-を表すことがより好ましい。 X 1 and X 2 are each independently a fluorine atom or a fluorine atom-containing alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms or an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms. Further, a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms is more preferable, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferable.
Y 1 and Y 2, at least one of -SO 2 - preferably represents an, both -SO 2 - and more preferably represents.
X3、X4およびX5は、それぞれ独立に、フッ素原子またはフッ素原子を有するアルキル基が好ましく、フッ素原子を有するアルキル基がより好ましい。フッ素原子を有するアルキル基は、フッ素原子を有する炭素数1~10のアルキル基が好ましく、炭素数1~10のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがより好ましく、炭素数1~4のペルフルオロアルキル基であることがさらに好ましく、トリフルオロメチル基が特に好ましい。 As the tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion, a structure represented by the following general formula (AN-2) is preferable.
X 3 , X 4 and X 5 are each independently preferably a fluorine atom or an alkyl group having a fluorine atom, more preferably an alkyl group having a fluorine atom. The alkyl group having a fluorine atom is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms having a fluorine atom, more preferably a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and a perfluoroalkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms. Is more preferable, and a trifluoromethyl group is particularly preferable.
い。 In the formula (I-1), at least one of R 1 , R 2 , R 7 to R 12 , R Y1 and X has a bonding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer, and R 1 , R 2 , Preferably, at least one of R 7 to R 12 and R Y1 has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer, and at least one of R 1 , R 2 and R Y1 is an atomic group constituting a dye multimer It is more preferable to have a binding site.
Yes.
置換基としては、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルケニル基、アルキニル基、アリール基、ヘテロ環基、シアノ基、ヒドロキシル基、ニトロ基、カルボキシル基、アルコキシ基、アリールオキシ基、シリルオキシ基、ヘテロ環オキシ基、アシルオキシ基、カルバモイルオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基、アミノ基(アルキルアミノ基、アニリノ基を含む)、アシルアミノ基、アミノカルボニルアミノ基、アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基、アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基、スルファモイルアミノ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニルアミノ基、メルカプト基、アルキルチオ基、アリールチオ基、ヘテロ環チオ基、スルファモイル基、スルホ基、アルキルまたはアリールスルフィニル基、アルキルまたはアリールスルホニル基、アシル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、カルバモイル基、アリールまたはヘテロ環アゾ基、イミド基、ホスフィノ基、ホスフィニル基、ホスフィニルオキシ基、ホスフィニルアミノ基、シリル基などが挙げられる。以下詳細に記述する。
ハロゲン原子(例えば、フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、ヨウ素原子);
アルキル基(直鎖、分岐または環状の置換もしくは無置換のアルキル基で、好ましくは炭素数1~30のアルキル基であり、例えばメチル、エチル、n-プロピル、イソプロピル、tert-ブチル、n-オクチル、2-クロロエチル、2-シアノエチル、2-エチルヘキシル)、シクロヘキシル、シクロペンチルが挙げられる。環状アルキル基は、多シクロアルキル基、例えば、ビシクロアルキル基(好ましくは、炭素数5~30の置換もしくは無置換のビシクロアルキル基で、例えば、ビシクロ[1,2,2]ヘプタン-2-イル、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクタン-3-イル)やトリシクロアルキル基等の多環構造の基も挙げられる。環状のアルキル基は、好ましくは単環のシクロアルキル基、ビシクロアルキル基であり、単環のシクロアルキル基が特に好ましい);
アルケニル基(直鎖、分岐または環状の置換もしくは無置換のアルケニル基で、好ましくは炭素数2~30のアルケニル基であり、例えば、ビニル、アリル、プレニル、ゲラニル、オレイル、2-シクロペンテン-1-イル、2-シクロヘキセン-1-イルが挙げられる。環状のアルケニル基は、多シクロアルケニル基、例えば、ビシクロアルケニル基(好ましくは、炭素数5~30の置換もしくは無置換のビシクロアルケニル基で、例えば、ビシクロ[2,2,1]ヘプト-2-エン-1-イル、ビシクロ[2,2,2]オクト-2-エン-4-イル)やトリシクロアルケニル基も好ましい。環状のアルケニル基は、単環のシクロアルケニル基が特に好ましい。);
アルキニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキニル基、例えば、エチニル、プロパルギル、トリメチルシリルエチニル基);
アリール基(好ましくは炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリール基で、例えばフェニル、p-トリル、ナフチル、m-クロロフェニル、o-ヘキサデカノイルアミノフェニル);
ヘテロ環基(5~7員の置換もしくは無置換、飽和もしくは不飽和、芳香族もしくは非芳香族、単環もしくは縮環のヘテロ環基が好ましく、環構成原子が炭素原子と、窒素原子、酸素原子および硫黄原子のいずれかのヘテロ原子を少なくとも一個有するヘテロ環基がさらに好ましく、炭素数3~30の5もしくは6員の芳香族のヘテロ環基(ヘテロアリール基)である。);
シアノ基;
ヒドロキシル基;
ニトロ基;
カルボキシル基(水素原子が解離していてもよく(すなわち、カルボネート基)、塩の状態(金属塩(例えば、ナトリウム塩、カリウム塩、マグネシウム塩、カルシウム塩、鉄塩、アルミニウム塩等)、アルキルアンモニウム塩(例えば、オクチルアミン、ラウリルアミン、ステアリルアミン等の長鎖モノアルキルアミンのアンモニウム塩、パルミチルトリメチルアンモニウム、ジラウリルジメチルアンモニウム、ジステアリルジメチルアンモニウム塩等の4級アルキルアンモニウム塩)など)であってもよい);
アルコキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルコキシ基で、例えば、メトキシ、エトキシ、イソプロポキシ、tert-ブトキシ、n-オクチルオキシ、2-メトキシエトキシ);
アリールオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシ、2-メチルフェノキシ、2,4-ジ-tert-アミルフェノキシ、4-tert-ブチルフェノキシ、3-ニトロフェノキシ、2-テトラデカノイルアミノフェノキシ);
シリルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数3~20のシリルオキシ基で、例えば、トリメチルシリルオキシ、tert-ブチルジメチルシリルオキシ);
ヘテロ環オキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環オキシ基で、ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明されたヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-オキシ、2-テトラヒドロピラニルオキシ);
アシルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルカルボニルオキシ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニルオキシ基であり、例えば、ホルミルオキシ、アセチルオキシ、ピバロイルオキシ、ステアロイルオキシ、ベンゾイルオキシ、p-メトキシフェニルカルボニルオキシ);
カルバモイルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のカルバモイルオキシ基で、例えば、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイルオキシ、N,N-ジエチルカルバモイルオキシ、モルホリノカルボニルオキシ、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルアミノカルボニルオキシ、N-n-オクチルカルバモイルオキシ);
アルコキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルコキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えばメトキシカルボニルオキシ、エトキシカルボニルオキシ、tert-ブトキシカルボニルオキシ、n-オクチルカルボニルオキシ);
アリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルオキシ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルオキシ、p-メトキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ、p-n-ヘキサデシルオキシフェノキシカルボニルオキシ);
アミノ基(アルキルアミノ基、アリールアミノ基およびヘテロアリールアミノ基を含む。好ましくは、アミノ基、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールアミノ基、炭素数0~30のヘテロアリールアミノ基であり、例えば、アミノ、メチルアミノ、ジメチルアミノ、アニリノ、N-メチル-アニリノ、ジフェニルアミノ、N-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イルアミノ);
アシルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルカルボニルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニルアミノ基であり、例えば、ホルミルアミノ、アセチルアミノ、ピバロイルアミノ、ラウロイルアミノ、ベンゾイルアミノ、3,4,5-トリ-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニルアミノ);
アミノカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアミノカルボニルアミノ基、例えば、カルバモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、N,N-ジエチルアミノカルボニルアミノ、モルホリノカルボニルアミノ);
アルコキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルコキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニルアミノ、エトキシカルボニルアミノ、tert-ブトキシカルボニルアミノ、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニルアミノ、N-メチル-メトキシカルボニルアミノ);
アリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニルアミノ基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニルアミノ、p-クロロフェノキシカルボニルアミノ、m-n-オクチルオキシフェノキシカルボニルアミノ);
スルファモイルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数0~30の置換もしくは無置換のスルファモイルアミノ基で、例えば、スルファモイルアミノ、N,N-ジメチルアミノスルホニルアミノ、N-n-オクチルアミノスルホニルアミノ);
アルキル又はアリールスルホニルアミノ基(好ましくは炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルスルホニルアミノ基、炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールスルホニルアミノ基であり、例えば、メチルスルホニルアミノ、ブチルスルホニルアミノ、フェニルスルホニルアミノ、2,3,5-トリクロロフェニルスルホニルアミノ、p-メチルフェニルスルホニルアミノ);
メルカプト基;
アルキルチオ基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のアルキルチオ基で、例えばメチルチオ、エチルチオ、n-ヘキサデシルチオ);
アリールチオ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールチオ基で、例えば、フェニルチオ、p-クロロフェニルチオ、m-メトキシフェニルチオ);
ヘテロ環チオ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のヘテロ環チオ基で、ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明したヘテロ環部が好ましく、例えば、2-ベンゾチアゾリルチオ、1-フェニルテトラゾール-5-イルチオ);
スルファモイル基(好ましくは、炭素数0~30の置換もしくは無置換のスルファモイル基で、例えば、N-エチルスルファモイル、N-(3-ドデシルオキシプロピル)スルファモイル、N,N-ジメチルスルファモイル、N-アセチルスルファモイル、N-ベンゾイルスルファモイル、N-(N’-フェニルカルバモイル)スルファモイル);
スルホ基(水素原子が解離していてもよく(すなわち、スルホネート基)、塩の状態(金属塩(例えば、ナトリウム塩、カリウム塩、マグネシウム塩、カルシウム塩、鉄塩、アルミニウム塩等)、アルキルアンモニウム塩(例えば、オクチルアミン、ラウリルアミン、ステアリルアミン等の長鎖モノアルキルアミンのアンモニウム塩、パルミチルトリメチルアンモニウム、ジラウリルジメチルアンモニウム、ジステアリルジメチルアンモニウム塩等の4級アルキルアンモニウム塩)など)であってもよい);
アルキル又はアリールスルフィニル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルフィニル基、6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルフィニル基であり、例えば、メチルスルフィニル、エチルスルフィニル、フェニルスルフィニル、p-メチルフェニルスルフィニル);
アルキル又はアリールスルホニル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換または無置換のアルキルスルホニル基、6~30の置換または無置換のアリールスルホニル基であり、例えば、メチルスルホニル、エチルスルホニル、フェニルスルホニル、p-メチルフェニルスルホニル);
アシル基(好ましくはホルミル基、炭素数2~30の置換または無置換のアルキルカルボニル基、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールカルボニル基であり、例えば、アセチル、ピバロイル、2-クロロアセチル、ステアロイル、ベンゾイル、p-n-オクチルオキシフェニルカルボニル);
アリールオキシカルボニル基(好ましくは、炭素数7~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールオキシカルボニル基で、例えば、フェノキシカルボニル、o-クロロフェノキシカルボニル、m-ニトロフェノキシカルボニル、p-tert-ブチルフェノキシカルボニル);
アルコキシカルボニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換アルコキシカルボニル基で、例えば、メトキシカルボニル、エトキシカルボニル、tert-ブトキシカルボニル、n-オクタデシルオキシカルボニル);
カルバモイル基(好ましくは、炭素数1~30の置換もしくは無置換のカルバモイル、例えば、カルバモイル、N-メチルカルバモイル、N,N-ジメチルカルバモイル、N,N-ジ-n-オクチルカルバモイル、N-(メチルスルホニル)カルバモイル)
アリール又はヘテロ環アゾ基(好ましくは炭素数6~30の置換もしくは無置換のアリールアゾ基、炭素数3~30の置換もしくは無置換のヘテロ環アゾ基(ヘテロ環部は前述のヘテロ環基で説明したヘテロ環部が好ましい)、例えば、フェニルアゾ、p-クロロフェニルアゾ、5-エチルチオ-1,3,4-チアジアゾール-2-イルアゾ);
イミド基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のイミド基で、例えばN-スクシンイミド、メチルフタルイミド);
ホスフィノ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィノ基、例えば、ジメチルホスフィノ、ジフェニルホスフィノ、メチルフェノキシホスフィノ);
ホスフィニル基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニル基で、例えば、ホスフィニル、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニル、ジエトキシホスフィニル);
ホスフィニルオキシ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニルオキシ基で、例えば、ジフェノキシホスフィニルオキシ、ジオクチルオキシホスフィニルオキシ);
ホスフィニルアミノ基(好ましくは、炭素数2~30の置換もしくは無置換のホスフィニルアミノ基で、例えば、ジメトキシホスフィニルアミノ、ジメチルアミノホスフィニルアミノ);
シリル基(好ましくは、炭素数3~30の置換もしくは無置換のシリル基で、例えば、トリメチルシリル、tert-ブチルジメチルシリル、フェニルジメチルシリル)が挙げられる。
これらの基は、さらに置換可能な基である場合、さらに置換基を有してもよい。さらなる置換基としては、上述した置換基A群で説明した基が挙げられる。 (Substituent group A)
Substituents include halogen atoms, alkyl groups, alkenyl groups, alkynyl groups, aryl groups, heterocyclic groups, cyano groups, hydroxyl groups, nitro groups, carboxyl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, silyloxy groups, heterocyclic oxy groups. , Acyloxy group, carbamoyloxy group, alkoxycarbonyloxy group, amino group (including alkylamino group and anilino group), acylamino group, aminocarbonylamino group, alkoxycarbonylamino group, aryloxycarbonylamino group, sulfamoylamino group , Alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group, mercapto group, alkylthio group, arylthio group, heterocyclic thio group, sulfamoyl group, sulfo group, alkyl or arylsulfinyl group, alkyl or arylsulfonyl group, Group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl group, an aryl or heterocyclic azo group, an imido group, a phosphino group, phosphinyl group, phosphinyloxy group, phosphinylamino group, and a silyl group. Details are described below.
A halogen atom (for example, fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, iodine atom);
Alkyl group (straight-chain, branched or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkyl group, preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl) 2-chloroethyl, 2-cyanoethyl, 2-ethylhexyl), cyclohexyl and cyclopentyl. The cyclic alkyl group is a polycycloalkyl group such as a bicycloalkyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms such as bicyclo [1,2,2] heptan-2-yl. And groups having a polycyclic structure such as bicyclo [2,2,2] octane-3-yl) and tricycloalkyl groups. The cyclic alkyl group is preferably a monocyclic cycloalkyl group or a bicycloalkyl group, and a monocyclic cycloalkyl group is particularly preferred);
Alkenyl groups (straight-chain, branched or cyclic substituted or unsubstituted alkenyl groups, preferably alkenyl groups having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as vinyl, allyl, prenyl, geranyl, oleyl, 2-cyclopentene-1- The cyclic alkenyl group is a polycycloalkenyl group such as a bicycloalkenyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted bicycloalkenyl group having 5 to 30 carbon atoms, such as Bicyclo [2,2,1] hept-2-en-1-yl, bicyclo [2,2,2] oct-2-en-4-yl) and tricycloalkenyl groups are also preferred. A monocyclic cycloalkenyl group is particularly preferred).
An alkynyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkynyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as ethynyl, propargyl, trimethylsilylethynyl group);
An aryl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenyl, p-tolyl, naphthyl, m-chlorophenyl, o-hexadecanoylaminophenyl);
Heterocyclic group (5- to 7-membered substituted or unsubstituted, saturated or unsaturated, aromatic or non-aromatic, monocyclic or condensed heterocyclic group is preferred, and the ring-constituting atoms are carbon, nitrogen, oxygen A heterocyclic group having at least one hetero atom of any one of an atom and a sulfur atom is more preferable, and a 5- or 6-membered aromatic heterocyclic group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (heteroaryl group));
A cyano group;
A hydroxyl group;
A nitro group;
Carboxyl group (hydrogen atom may be dissociated (that is, carbonate group), salt state (metal salt (for example, sodium salt, potassium salt, magnesium salt, calcium salt, iron salt, aluminum salt, etc.), alkyl ammonium) Salts (eg, ammonium salts of long-chain monoalkylamines such as octylamine, laurylamine, stearylamine, quaternary alkylammonium salts such as palmityltrimethylammonium, dilauryldimethylammonium, distearyldimethylammonium salts, etc.) May be);
An alkoxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxy, ethoxy, isopropoxy, tert-butoxy, n-octyloxy, 2-methoxyethoxy);
Aryloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms such as phenoxy, 2-methylphenoxy, 2,4-di-tert-amylphenoxy, 4-tert-butylphenoxy, 3-nitrophenoxy, 2-tetradecanoylaminophenoxy);
A silyloxy group (preferably a silyloxy group having 3 to 20 carbon atoms, for example, trimethylsilyloxy, tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy);
Heterocyclic oxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic oxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, wherein the heterocyclic part is preferably the heterocyclic part described above for the heterocyclic group, for example, 1-phenyltetrazole -5-oxy, 2-tetrahydropyranyloxy);
An acyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyloxy group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formyloxy, acetyloxy, pivaloyloxy, Stearoyloxy, benzoyloxy, p-methoxyphenylcarbonyloxy);
A carbamoyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyloxy group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as N, N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy, N, N-diethylcarbamoyloxy, morpholinocarbonyloxy, N, N-di -N-octylaminocarbonyloxy, Nn-octylcarbamoyloxy);
An alkoxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyloxy, ethoxycarbonyloxy, tert-butoxycarbonyloxy, n-octylcarbonyloxy);
Aryloxycarbonyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyloxy group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms such as phenoxycarbonyloxy, p-methoxyphenoxycarbonyloxy, pn-hexadecyloxyphenoxycarbonyloxy );
Amino group (including alkylamino group, arylamino group and heteroarylamino group. Preferably, amino group, substituted or unsubstituted alkylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms. An arylamino group, a heteroarylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, anilino, N-methyl-anilino, diphenylamino, N-1,3,5-triazine-2- Ilamino);
An acylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as formylamino, acetylamino, pivaloylamino, Lauroylamino, benzoylamino, 3,4,5-tri-n-octyloxyphenylcarbonylamino);
Aminocarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aminocarbonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as carbamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminocarbonylamino, N, N-diethylaminocarbonylamino, morpholinocarbonylamino) ;
An alkoxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms such as methoxycarbonylamino, ethoxycarbonylamino, tert-butoxycarbonylamino, n-octadecyloxycarbonylamino, N— Methyl-methoxycarbonylamino);
Aryloxycarbonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonylamino group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonylamino, p-chlorophenoxycarbonylamino, mn-octyloxyphenoxycarbonylamino) ;
Sulfamoylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoylamino group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as sulfamoylamino, N, N-dimethylaminosulfonylamino, Nn-octylaminosulfonyl) amino);
An alkyl or arylsulfonylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonylamino group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonylamino group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonylamino, butyl Sulfonylamino, phenylsulfonylamino, 2,3,5-trichlorophenylsulfonylamino, p-methylphenylsulfonylamino);
A mercapto group;
An alkylthio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylthio group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylthio, ethylthio, n-hexadecylthio);
An arylthio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylthio group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenylthio, p-chlorophenylthio, m-methoxyphenylthio);
Heterocyclic thio group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, and the heterocyclic portion is preferably the heterocyclic portion described above for the heterocyclic group, for example, 2-benzothiazolyl Luthio, 1-phenyltetrazol-5-ylthio);
Sulfamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted sulfamoyl group having 0 to 30 carbon atoms, such as N-ethylsulfamoyl, N- (3-dodecyloxypropyl) sulfamoyl, N, N-dimethylsulfamoyl, N-acetylsulfamoyl, N-benzoylsulfamoyl, N- (N′-phenylcarbamoyl) sulfamoyl);
Sulfo group (hydrogen atom may be dissociated (that is, sulfonate group), salt state (metal salt (for example, sodium salt, potassium salt, magnesium salt, calcium salt, iron salt, aluminum salt, etc.), alkyl ammonium) Salts (eg, ammonium salts of long-chain monoalkylamines such as octylamine, laurylamine, stearylamine, quaternary alkylammonium salts such as palmityltrimethylammonium, dilauryldimethylammonium, distearyldimethylammonium salts, etc.) May be);
An alkyl or arylsulfinyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfinyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfinyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfinyl, ethylsulfinyl, phenylsulfinyl, p-methylphenylsulfinyl);
An alkyl or arylsulfonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkylsulfonyl group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylsulfonyl group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methylsulfonyl, ethylsulfonyl, phenylsulfonyl, p-methylphenylsulfonyl);
An acyl group (preferably a formyl group, a substituted or unsubstituted alkylcarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted arylcarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as acetyl, pivaloyl, 2-chloroacetyl; , Stearoyl, benzoyl, pn-octyloxyphenylcarbonyl);
Aryloxycarbonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted aryloxycarbonyl group having 7 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phenoxycarbonyl, o-chlorophenoxycarbonyl, m-nitrophenoxycarbonyl, p-tert-butylphenoxycarbonyl) ;
An alkoxycarbonyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted alkoxycarbonyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl, tert-butoxycarbonyl, n-octadecyloxycarbonyl);
A carbamoyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted carbamoyl having 1 to 30 carbon atoms such as carbamoyl, N-methylcarbamoyl, N, N-dimethylcarbamoyl, N, N-di-n-octylcarbamoyl, N- (methyl Sulfonyl) carbamoyl)
An aryl or heterocyclic azo group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted arylazo group having 6 to 30 carbon atoms, a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic azo group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms (the heterocyclic portion is described in the above heterocyclic group) A heterocycle moiety thereof, for example, phenylazo, p-chlorophenylazo, 5-ethylthio-1,3,4-thiadiazol-2-ylazo);
An imide group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted imide group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as N-succinimide, methylphthalimide);
A phosphino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as dimethylphosphino, diphenylphosphino, methylphenoxyphosphino);
A phosphinyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyl group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as phosphinyl, dioctyloxyphosphinyl, diethoxyphosphinyl);
A phosphinyloxy group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinyloxy group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as diphenoxyphosphinyloxy, dioctyloxyphosphinyloxy);
A phosphinylamino group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted phosphinylamino group having 2 to 30 carbon atoms, such as dimethoxyphosphinylamino, dimethylaminophosphinylamino);
Examples thereof include a silyl group (preferably a substituted or unsubstituted silyl group having 3 to 30 carbon atoms, such as trimethylsilyl, tert-butyldimethylsilyl, phenyldimethylsilyl).
When these groups are further substitutable groups, they may further have a substituent. Examples of the further substituent include the groups described in the above-mentioned substituent group A.
本発明において、色素多量体は、2価以上の連結基に色素構造が2以上結合してなる構造を有することが好ましい。色素多量体は、側鎖に色素構造を有する繰り返し単位、および、主鎖に色素構造を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる少なくとも1つを有することが好ましい。 << Preferred Aspect of Dye Multimer >>
In the present invention, the dye multimer preferably has a structure in which two or more dye structures are bonded to a divalent or higher linking group. The dye multimer preferably has at least one selected from a repeating unit having a dye structure in the side chain and a repeating unit having a dye structure in the main chain.
色素多量体(A)は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。色素多量体(A)は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の10~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、20質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましい。
The dye multimer (A) preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the formula (A). In the dye multimer (A), the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。アリーレン基は置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、置換基A群で説明した基が挙げられる。
ヘテロ環連結基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環連結基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ環連結基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。ヘテロ環連結基は、置換基を有していてもよく、無置換であってもよい。置換基としては、置換基A群で説明した基が挙げられる。 The alkylene group preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, and still more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. The alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic. The alkylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described in the substituent group A.
The carbon number of the arylene group is preferably 6 to 20, and more preferably 6 to 12. The arylene group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described in the substituent group A.
The heterocyclic linking group is preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The hetero atom that the heterocyclic linking group has is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, or a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic linking group is preferably 1 to 3. The heterocyclic linking group may have a substituent or may be unsubstituted. Examples of the substituent include the groups described in the substituent group A.
付加重合には公知の付加重合(ラジカル重合、アニオン重合、カチオン重合)が適用できるが、このうち、特にラジカル重合により合成することが反応条件を穏和化でき、色素骨格を分解させないため好ましい。ラジカル重合には、公知の反応条件を適用することができる。
式(A)で表される繰り返し単位を有する色素多量体は、耐熱性の観点から、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する色素化合物を用いてラジカル重合して得られたラジカル重合体であることが好ましい。 The dye multimer containing the repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is (1) a method of synthesizing a dye compound having a polymerizable group by addition polymerization, (2) an isocyanate group, an acid anhydride group, an epoxy group, or the like. The polymer having a highly reactive functional group can be synthesized by a method of reacting a dye compound having a functional group (hydroxyl group, primary or secondary amino group, carboxyl group, etc.) capable of reacting with the highly reactive group.
Known addition polymerizations (radical polymerization, anionic polymerization, and cationic polymerization) can be applied to the addition polymerization. Among these, synthesis by radical polymerization is particularly preferable because the reaction conditions can be moderated and the dye skeleton is not decomposed. Known reaction conditions can be applied to the radical polymerization.
The dye multimer having a repeating unit represented by the formula (A) is preferably a radical polymer obtained by radical polymerization using a dye compound having an ethylenically unsaturated bond from the viewpoint of heat resistance. .
本発明における色素多量体は、式(A)で表される繰り返し単位の他に、他の繰り返し単位を含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位は、硬化性基、酸基等の官能基を含んでいてもよい。官能基を含んでいなくてもよい。色素多量体は、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましい。 (Other repeat units)
The dye multimer in the present invention may contain other repeating units in addition to the repeating unit represented by the formula (A). Other repeating units may contain a functional group such as a curable group or an acid group. It does not have to contain a functional group. The dye multimer preferably has at least one selected from a repeating unit having an acid group and a repeating unit having a curable group.
硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の0~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、1質量%以上がより好ましく、3質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、35質量%以下がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましい。 Examples of the curable group include a radical polymerizable group, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group. Examples of the radically polymerizable group include groups containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond such as a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. The curable group is preferably a radical polymerizable group.
The ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass with respect to all repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の0~50質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、1質量%以上がより好ましく、3質量%以上が更に好ましい。上限は、35質量%以下がより好ましく、30質量%以下が更に好ましい。 Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Only one type of acid group may be included, or two or more types of acid groups may be included.
The ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably 0 to 50% by mass of all repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 1% by mass or more, and still more preferably 3% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 35% by mass or less, and still more preferably 30% by mass or less.
2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基において、アルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しの数は、2~15個がより好ましく、2~10個がさらに好ましい。1つのアルキレンオキシ鎖は、-(CH2)nO-で表され、nは整数であるが、nは1~10が好ましく、1~5がより好ましく、2または3がさらに好ましい。 Other functional groups include groups consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, development promoting groups such as lactones, acid anhydrides, amides, cyano groups, long chain and cyclic alkyl groups, aralkyl groups, aryls Groups, polyalkylene oxide groups, hydroxyl groups, maleimide groups, amino group and other hydrophilicity adjusting groups, and the like can be appropriately introduced.
In the group consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, the number of repeating alkyleneoxy chains is more preferably 2 to 15, and further preferably 2 to 10. One alkyleneoxy chain is represented by — (CH 2 ) n O—, where n is an integer, n is preferably 1 to 10, more preferably 1 to 5, and even more preferably 2 or 3.
色素多量体(C)は、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位を含むことが好ましい。色素多量体(C)においては、式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の割合が、色素多量体を構成する全繰り返し単位の10~100質量%であることが好ましい。下限は、20質量%以上がより好ましく、30質量%以上が更に好ましく、50質量%以上が特に好ましい。上限は、95質量%以下がより好ましい。
The dye multimer (C) preferably contains a repeating unit represented by the formula (C). In the dye multimer (C), the ratio of the repeating unit represented by the formula (C) is preferably 10 to 100% by mass of the total repeating units constituting the dye multimer. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, further preferably 30% by mass or more, and particularly preferably 50% by mass or more. The upper limit is more preferably 95% by mass or less.
アリール基およびアリーレン基の炭素数は、6~20が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
ヘテロ環連結基およびヘテロ環基は、5員環または6員環が好ましい。ヘテロ環連結基およびヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子は、酸素原子、窒素原子および硫黄原子が好ましい。ヘテロ環連結基およびヘテロ環基が有するヘテロ原子の数は、1~3個が好ましい。
アルキレン基、アリーレン基、ヘテロ環連結基、アルキル基、アリール基、およびヘテロ環基は、無置換であってもよく、置換基を有してもよい。置換基としては、硬化性基、酸基が挙げられる。硬化性基としては、エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基等のラジカル重合性基、環状エーテル基(エポキシ基、オキセタニル基)、オキサゾリン基、メチロール基等が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合を含む基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基等が挙げられる。酸基としては、カルボキシル基、スルホン酸基、リン酸基が例示される。また、2~20個の無置換のアルキレンオキシ鎖の繰り返しからなる基、ラクトン、酸無水物、アミド、シアノ基等の現像促進基、長鎖および環状アルキル基、アラルキル基、アリール基、ポリアルキレンオキシド基、ヒドロキシル基、マレイミド基、アミノ基等の親疏水性調整基等を置換基として有してもよい。 The alkyl group and alkylene group preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms. The upper limit is more preferably 25 or less, and still more preferably 20 or less. The lower limit is more preferably 2 or more, and still more preferably 3 or more. The alkyl group and alkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group and arylene group is preferably 6-20, and more preferably 6-12.
The heterocyclic linking group and the heterocyclic group are preferably a 5-membered ring or a 6-membered ring. The hetero atom contained in the heterocyclic linking group and the heterocyclic group is preferably an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom or a sulfur atom. The number of heteroatoms contained in the heterocyclic linking group and the heterocyclic group is preferably 1 to 3.
The alkylene group, arylene group, heterocyclic linking group, alkyl group, aryl group, and heterocyclic group may be unsubstituted or may have a substituent. Examples of the substituent include a curable group and an acid group. Examples of the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phosphoric acid group. Further, a group consisting of repeating 2 to 20 unsubstituted alkyleneoxy chains, a development promoting group such as lactone, acid anhydride, amide, cyano group, long chain and cyclic alkyl group, aralkyl group, aryl group, polyalkylene You may have a hydrophilic group, such as an oxide group, a hydroxyl group, a maleimide group, an amino group, etc. as a substituent.
DyeIIIは、2以上のヘテロ原子を含み、かつ、ヘテロ原子の1以上が窒素原子であるカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素構造を表す。色素構造は、前述のカチオン性ヘテロ環を有する色素骨格を有するカチオンと、アニオンとを有する色素化合物の、カチオンまたはアニオンから、任意の原子を1個以上取り除いた構造が好ましく、カチオンから任意の原子を1個以上取り除いた構造がより好ましい。
mは0または1を表し、1が好ましい。 L 3 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, —NH—, —CO—, —O—, —COO—, —OCO—, —S—, or a linking group in which two or more thereof are combined.
DyeIII represents a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom. The dye structure is preferably a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms are removed from the cation or anion of the dye compound having a dye skeleton having a cationic heterocycle and an anion as described above. A structure in which one or more are removed is more preferable.
m represents 0 or 1, and 1 is preferable.
色素多量体(D)は、式(D)で表されることが好ましい。
The dye multimer (D) is preferably represented by the formula (D).
nとkとの合計は、2~20がであり、2~15が好ましく、2~14がより好ましく、2~8がさらに好ましく、2~7が特に好ましく、2~6が最も好ましい。
なお、1つの色素多量体におけるnおよびkは、それぞれ整数であるが、本発明においては、式(D)におけるn、kが異なる色素多量体を複数含んでいてもよい。従って、本発明の着色組成物中の、nおよびkの平均値は整数にならない場合がある。 In the formula (D), n is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 14, still more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and further preferably 2 to 6.
The total of n and k is 2 to 20, preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 14, still more preferably 2 to 8, particularly preferably 2 to 7, and most preferably 2 to 6.
Note that n and k in one dye multimer are integers, respectively, but in the present invention, a plurality of dye multimers in which n and k in formula (D) are different may be included. Therefore, the average value of n and k in the coloring composition of the present invention may not be an integer.
(n+k)価の連結基は、具体的な例として、下記の構造単位または以下の構造単位が2以上組み合わさって構成される基(環構造を形成していてもよい)を挙げることができる。 (N + k) -valent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and Groups consisting of 0 to 20 sulfur atoms are included.
Specific examples of the (n + k) -valent linking group include a group composed of a combination of two or more of the following structural units or the following structural units (which may form a ring structure). .
また、Pが表す置換基は、繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であってもよい。繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖は、ビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。kが2以上の場合、k個のPは、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが1の場合、Pはビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。また、Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが2以上の場合、k個のPのビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)であることが好ましい。
Pが繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖の場合、kが1の場合におけるPの繰り返し単位の数、kが2以上の場合におけるk個のPの繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、核磁気共鳴(NMR)により求めることができる。 In formula (D), P represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an acid group and a curable group. Examples of the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
The substituent represented by P may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit. The monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit is preferably a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound. When k is 2 or more, the k Ps may be the same or different.
When P is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 1, P has 2 to 20 repeating units derived from a vinyl compound (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10). Are preferable. In addition, when P is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units and k is 2 or more, the average number of repeating units derived from k P vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10).
When P is a monovalent polymer chain having repeating units, the number of repeating units of P when k is 1 and the average number of repeating units of P when k is 2 or more are expressed as It can be determined by resonance (NMR).
Pが、酸基を含む繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を含む繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。
Pが、硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。Pが、硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位を含有することにより、色ムラなどをより良化することができる。 When P is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit, examples of the repeating unit constituting P include other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A). It is preferable that another repeating unit has 1 or more types chosen from the repeating unit which has the acid group mentioned above, and the repeating unit which has a sclerosing | hardenable group. When the repeating unit having an acid group is contained, the developability can be improved. When the repeating unit having a curable group is included, the solvent resistance can be further improved.
When P contains a repeating unit containing an acid group, the proportion of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P.
When P includes a repeating unit having a curable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P. . When P contains a repeating unit having a curable group, color unevenness and the like can be further improved.
上記ポリマー鎖は、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位として、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましい。
上記ポリマー鎖が硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、ポリマー鎖の全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、5~50モルが好ましく、10~40モルがより好ましい。
上記ポリマー鎖が酸基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、ポリマー鎖の全繰り返し単位100モルに対し、例えば、5~50モルが好ましく、10~40モルがより好ましい。 Further, the dye structure represented by DyeIV is a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms of the dye compound are removed, and a part of the dye compound may be bonded to L 4. The polymer chain may include a repeating unit having a dye structure (a structure in which one or more arbitrary atoms of the dye compound are removed) in the side chain. The polymer chain is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye structure, but is one kind selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. Is preferred. The repeating unit of the polymer chain is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the above formula (A) and the repeating unit represented by the above formula (C). The total number of repeating units having a dye structure in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and further preferably 20 to 40 mol%. preferable.
The polymer chain may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having a dye structure. As other repeating units, it is preferable to have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a curable group.
When the polymer chain includes a repeating unit having a curable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 mol with respect to 100 mol of all repeating units of the polymer chain, and 10 to 40 mol. Is more preferable.
When the polymer chain includes a repeating unit having an acid group, the ratio of the repeating unit having an acid group is preferably, for example, 5 to 50 mol, more preferably 10 to 40 mol, relative to 100 mol of all repeating units of the polymer chain. preferable.
(1)カルボキシル基、ヒドロキシル基、アミノ基等から選択される官能基を末端に導入した化合物と、色素構造を有する酸ハライド、色素構造を有するアルキルハライド、あるいは色素構造を有するイソシアネート等と、を高分子反応させる方法。
(2)末端に炭素-炭素二重結合を導入した化合物と、色素構造を有するチオール化合物と、をマイケル付加反応させる方法。
(3)末端に炭素-炭素二重結合を導入した化合物と、色素構造を有するチオール化合物と、をラジカル発生剤存在下で反応させる方法。
(4)末端に複数のチオール基を導入した多官能チオール化合物と、炭素-炭素二重結合および色素構造とを有する化合物と、をラジカル発生剤の存在下で反応させる方法。
(5)色素構造を有するチオール化合物の存在下で、ビニル化合物をラジカル重合する方法。 The dye multimer represented by the formula (D) can be synthesized by the following method.
(1) A compound in which a functional group selected from a carboxyl group, a hydroxyl group, an amino group and the like is introduced at the end, an acid halide having a dye structure, an alkyl halide having a dye structure, an isocyanate having a dye structure, and the like. Polymer reaction method.
(2) A method of Michael addition reaction between a compound having a carbon-carbon double bond introduced at the terminal and a thiol compound having a dye structure.
(3) A method in which a compound in which a carbon-carbon double bond is introduced at a terminal and a thiol compound having a dye structure are reacted in the presence of a radical generator.
(4) A method in which a polyfunctional thiol compound having a plurality of thiol groups introduced at its terminal is reacted with a compound having a carbon-carbon double bond and a dye structure in the presence of a radical generator.
(5) A method in which a vinyl compound is radically polymerized in the presence of a thiol compound having a dye structure.
(D1-L42)n-L4-(L41-P1)k ・・・(D-1)
式(D-1)中、L4は(n+k)価の連結基を表す。nは2~20の整数を表し、kは0~20の整数を表す。D1は、色素構造を表し、P1は、置換基を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数のD1は互いに異なっていても良く、kが2以上の場合、複数のP1は互いに異なっていても良い。n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。 The dye multimer (D) preferably has a structure represented by the formula (D-1).
(D 1 -L 42) n -L 4 - (L 41 -P 1) k ··· (D-1)
In formula (D-1), L 4 represents an (n + k) -valent linking group. n represents an integer of 2 to 20, and k represents an integer of 0 to 20. D 1 represents a dye structure, and P 1 represents a substituent. When n is 2 or more, the plurality of D 1 may be different from each other, and when k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 1 may be different from each other. n + k represents an integer of 2 to 20.
2価の連結基としては、1から100個までの炭素原子、0個から10個までの窒素原子、0個から50個までの酸素原子、1個から200個までの水素原子、および0個から20個までの硫黄原子から成り立つ基が含まれ、無置換でも置換基を更に有していてもよい。 In formula (D-1), L 41 and L 42 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. When a plurality of L 41 and L 42 are present, they may be the same or different.
Divalent linking groups include 1 to 100 carbon atoms, 0 to 10 nitrogen atoms, 0 to 50 oxygen atoms, 1 to 200 hydrogen atoms, and 0 To 20 sulfur atoms are included, which may be unsubstituted or further substituted.
また、P1が表す置換基は、繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であってもよい。繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖は、ビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。kが2以上の場合、k個のP1は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
P1が繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが1の場合、P1はビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。また、P1が繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが2以上の場合、k個のP1のビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)であることが好ましい。 In formula (D-1), P 1 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an acid group and a curable group. Examples of the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
Further, the substituent represented by P 1 may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit. The monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit is preferably a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound. When k is 2 or more, k P 1 s may be the same or different.
When P 1 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 1, P 1 has 2 to 20 repeating units derived from a vinyl compound (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 Monovalent polymer chains having ˜10) are preferred. In addition, when P 1 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 2 or more, the average number of repeating units derived from k P 1 vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 ( The number is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10.
P1が、酸基を含む繰り返し単位を含む場合、酸基を含む繰り返し単位の割合は、P1の全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。
P1が、硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位を含む場合、硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位の割合は、Pの全繰り返し単位に対して、10~80モル%が好ましく、10~65モル%がより好ましい。 When P 1 represents a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit, examples of the repeating unit constituting P 1 include the other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) described above. It is preferable that another repeating unit has 1 or more types chosen from the repeating unit which has the acid group mentioned above, and the repeating unit which has a sclerosing | hardenable group.
When P 1 contains a repeating unit containing an acid group, the ratio of the repeating unit containing an acid group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all repeating units of P 1. .
When P 1 includes a repeating unit having a curable group, the ratio of the repeating unit having a curable group is preferably 10 to 80 mol%, more preferably 10 to 65 mol%, based on all the repeating units of P. preferable.
上記ポリマー鎖は、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位として、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましい。 In formula (D-1), D 1 represents a dye structure. The dye structure represented by D 1 may be one in which a part of the dye compound is bonded to L 42 , or may be a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye structure in the main chain or side chain. The polymer chain is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye structure, but is preferably one selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. . The repeating unit of the polymer chain is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the above formula (A) and the repeating unit represented by the above formula (C). The total number of repeating units having a dye structure in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and further preferably 20 to 40 mol%. preferable.
The polymer chain may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having a dye structure. As other repeating units, it is preferable to have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a curable group.
(D2-S-C1-B1)n-L4-(B2-C2-S-P2)k ・・・(D-2)
式(D-2)中、L4は(n+k)価の連結基を表す。nは2~20の整数を表し、kは0~20の整数を表す。D2は、色素構造を表し、P2は、置換基を表す。B1およびB2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合、-O-、-S-、-CO-、-NR-、-O2C-、-CO2-、-NROC-、または、-CONR-を表す。Rは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。C1およびC2は、それぞれ独立に、単結合または2価の連結基を表す。Sは、硫黄原子を表す。nが2以上の場合、複数のD2は互いに異なっていても良く、kが2以上の場合、複数のP2は互いに異なっていても良い。n+kは、2~20の整数を表す。 The dye multimer (D) preferably has a structure represented by the formula (D-2).
(D 2 -S-C 1 -B 1) n -L 4 - (B 2 -C 2 -S-P 2) k ··· (D-2)
In formula (D-2), L 4 represents an (n + k) -valent linking group. n represents an integer of 2 to 20, and k represents an integer of 0 to 20. D 2 represents a dye structure, and P 2 represents a substituent. B 1 and B 2 are each independently a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, —NROC—, or —CONR—. Represents. R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group. C 1 and C 2 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. S represents a sulfur atom. When n is 2 or more, the plurality of D 2 may be different from each other, and when k is 2 or more, the plurality of P 2 may be different from each other. n + k represents an integer of 2 to 20.
Rは、水素原子、アルキル基またはアリール基を表す。
Rが表すアルキル基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。アルキル基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。
Rが表すアリール基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。
Rは水素原子またはアルキル基が好ましく、水素原子がより好ましい。 In the formula (D-2), B 1 and B 2 are each independently a single bond, —O—, —S—, —CO—, —NR—, —O 2 C—, —CO 2 —, — NROC-, or represents -CONR-, single bond, -O -, - CO -, - O 2 C -, - CO 2 -, - NROC-, or -CONR- is preferred.
R represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aryl group.
The alkyl group represented by R preferably has 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The number of carbon atoms of the aryl group represented by R is preferably 6-30, and more preferably 6-12.
R is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom.
2価の連結基としては、アルキレン基、アリーレン基、オキシアルキレン基が好ましく、アルキレン基またはオキシアルキレン基がより好ましい。
アルキレン基、オキシアルキレン基の炭素数は、1~30が好ましく、1~10がより好ましい。アルキル基、オキシアルキレン基は、直鎖、分岐、環状のいずれであってもよい。
アリーレン基の炭素数は、6~30が好ましく、6~12がより好ましい。 In formula (D-2), C 1 and C 2 each independently represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
The divalent linking group is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group or an oxyalkylene group, more preferably an alkylene group or an oxyalkylene group.
The alkylene group and oxyalkylene group preferably have 1 to 30 carbon atoms, and more preferably 1 to 10 carbon atoms. The alkyl group and oxyalkylene group may be linear, branched or cyclic.
The number of carbon atoms in the arylene group is preferably 6 to 30, and more preferably 6 to 12.
また、P2が表す置換基は、繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であってもよい。繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖は、ビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。kが2以上の場合、k個のP2は、同一であっても、異なっていてもよい。
P2が繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが1の場合、P2はビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位を2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)有する1価のポリマー鎖が好ましい。また、P2が繰り返し単位を有する1価のポリマー鎖であり、かつ、kが2以上の場合、k個のP2のビニル化合物由来の繰り返し単位の個数の平均値は、2~20個(好ましくは、2~15個、更に好ましくは2~10個)であることが好ましい。 In formula (D-2), P 2 represents a substituent. Examples of the substituent include an acid group and a curable group. Examples of the curable group include a radical polymerizable group such as a group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether group (epoxy group, oxetanyl group), an oxazoline group, and a methylol group. Examples of the group containing an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group. Examples of the acid group include a carboxyl group, a sulfonic acid group and a phosphoric acid group.
Further, the substituent represented by P 2 may be a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit. The monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit is preferably a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit derived from a vinyl compound. When k is 2 or more, k P 2 s may be the same or different.
When P 2 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 1, P 2 contains 2 to 20 repeating units derived from a vinyl compound (preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 Monovalent polymer chains having ˜10) are preferred. In addition, when P 2 is a monovalent polymer chain having a repeating unit and k is 2 or more, the average number of repeating units derived from k P 2 vinyl compounds is 2 to 20 ( The number is preferably 2 to 15, more preferably 2 to 10.
上記ポリマー鎖は、色素構造を有する繰り返し単位の他に、色素多量体(A)で説明した他の繰り返し単位などを含んでいてもよい。他の繰り返し単位として、酸基を有する繰り返し単位および硬化性基を有する繰り返し単位から選ばれる1種以上を有することが好ましい。 In the formula (D-2), D 2 represents a dye structure. The dye structure represented by D 2 may be one in which a part of the dye compound is bonded to —S—, or may be a polymer chain containing a repeating unit having a dye structure in the main chain or side chain. . The polymer chain is not particularly defined as long as it contains a dye structure, but is preferably one selected from (meth) acrylic resins, styrene resins, and (meth) acrylic / styrene resins. . The repeating unit of the polymer chain is not particularly defined, and examples thereof include the repeating unit represented by the above formula (A) and the repeating unit represented by the above formula (C). The total number of repeating units having a dye structure in all repeating units constituting the polymer chain is preferably 5 to 60 mol%, more preferably 10 to 50 mol%, and further preferably 20 to 40 mol%. preferable.
The polymer chain may contain other repeating units described in the dye multimer (A) in addition to the repeating unit having a dye structure. As other repeating units, it is preferable to have one or more selected from repeating units having an acid group and repeating units having a curable group.
色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)と、数平均分子量(Mn)との比〔(Mw)/(Mn)〕は1.0~2.0であることが好ましく、1.1~1.8であることがさらに好ましく、1.1~1.5であることが特に好ましい。
なお、本発明において、色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)測定によるポリスチレン換算値であり、具体的には、後述する実施例に記載の方法で測定した値である。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 6000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30000 or less, and still more preferably 20000 or less. By satisfying the above range, it is easy to produce a cured film in which color unevenness and defects are suppressed.
The ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 2.0, and 1.1 to 1. 8 is more preferable, and 1.1 to 1.5 is particularly preferable.
In addition, in this invention, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of a pigment | dye multimer is a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement, Specifically, the value measured by the method as described in the Example mentioned later. It is.
本発明の着色組成物は、上述した色素多量体以外の着色剤(他の着色剤)をさらに用いることができる。本発明の着色組成物は、他の着色剤を含んでいる方が好ましい。他の着色剤は、染料および顔料のいずれでもよく、両者を併用してもよい。他の着色剤は顔料が好ましい。また、他の着色剤は、色素多量体であってもよい。 << other colorants >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can further use a coloring agent (other coloring agent) other than the above-described dye multimer. The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains another colorant. The other colorant may be either a dye or a pigment, or a combination of both. Other colorants are preferably pigments. The other colorant may be a dye multimer.
C.I.ピグメントイエロー1,2,3,4,5,6,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,20,24,31,32,34,35,35:1,36,36:1,37,37:1,40,42,43,53,55,60,61,62,63,65,73,74,77,81,83,86,93,94,95,97,98,100,101,104,106,108,109,110,113,114,115,116,117,118,119,120,123,125,126,127,128,129,137,138,139,147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175,176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214等、
C.I.ピグメントオレンジ 2,5,13,16,17:1,31,34,36,38,43,46,48,49,51,52,55,59,60,61,62,64,71,73等、
C.I.ピグメントレッド 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,9,10,14,17,22,23,31,38,41,48:1,48:2,48:3,48:4,49,49:1,49:2,52:1,52:2,53:1,57:1,60:1,63:1,66,67,81:1,81:2,81:3,83,88,90,105,112,119,122,123,144,146,149,150,155,166,168,169,170,171,172,175,176,177,178,179,184,185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279
C.I.ピグメントグリーン 7,10,36,37,58,59
C.I.ピグメントバイオレット 1,19,23,27,32,37,42
C.I.ピグメントブルー 1,2,15,15:1,15:2,15:3,15:4,15:6,16,22,60,64,66,79,80
C.I.ピグメントブラック 1
また、緑色顔料として、分子中のハロゲン原子数が平均10~14個であり、臭素原子が平均8~12個であり、塩素原子が平均2~5個であるハロゲン化亜鉛フタロシアニン顔料を用いることも可能である。具体例としては、WO2015/118720公報に記載の化合物が挙げられる。
また、黄色顔料として、特開2013-54339号公報の段落0011~0034に記載のキノフタロン顔料、特開2014-26228号公報の段落0013~0058に記載のキノフタロン顔料などを用いることもできる。
これら有機顔料は、単独若しくは色純度を上げるため種々組合せて用いることができる。 The following can be mentioned as an organic pigment. However, the present invention is not limited to these.
C. I. Pigment Yellow 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, 24, 31, 32, 34, 35, 35: 1, 36, 36: 1, 37, 37: 1, 40, 42, 43, 53, 55, 60, 61, 62, 63, 65, 73, 74, 77, 81, 83, 86, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 100, 101, 104, 106, 108, 109, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 123, 125, 126, 127, 128, 129, 137, 138, 139, 147,148,150,151,152,153,154,155,156,161,162,164,166,167,168,169,170,171,172,173,174,175 176,177,179,180,181,182,185,187,188,193,194,199,213,214, etc.,
C. I. Pigment Orange 2, 5, 13, 16, 17: 1, 31, 34, 36, 38, 43, 46, 48, 49, 51, 52, 55, 59, 60, 61, 62, 64, 71, 73, etc. ,
C. I. Pigment Red 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10, 14, 17, 22, 23, 31, 38, 41, 48: 1, 48: 2, 48: 3, 48: 4 49, 49: 1, 49: 2, 52: 1, 52: 2, 53: 1, 57: 1, 60: 1, 63: 1, 66, 67, 81: 1, 81: 2, 81: 3 83, 88, 90, 105, 112, 119, 122, 123, 144, 146, 149, 150, 155, 166, 168, 169, 170, 171, 172, 175, 176, 177, 178, 179, 184 185,187,188,190,200,202,206,207,208,209,210,216,220,224,226,242,246,254,255,264,270,272,279
C. I. Pigment Green 7, 10, 36, 37, 58, 59
C. I. Pigment Violet 1,19,23,27,32,37,42
C. I. Pigment Blue 1, 2, 15, 15: 1, 15: 2, 15: 3, 15: 4, 15: 6, 16, 22, 60, 64, 66, 79, 80
C. I. Pigment Black 1
Further, as the green pigment, a zinc halide phthalocyanine pigment having an average number of halogen atoms in the molecule of 10 to 14, bromine atoms on average 8 to 12, and chlorine atoms on average 2 to 5 should be used. Is also possible. Specific examples include the compounds described in WO2015 / 118720.
Further, as yellow pigments, quinophthalone pigments described in paragraphs 0011 to 0034 of JP2013-54339A, quinophthalone pigments described in paragraphs 0013 to 0058 of JP2014-26228A, and the like can also be used.
These organic pigments can be used alone or in various combinations in order to increase color purity.
また、本発明の着色組成物は他の着色剤を実質的に含有しない態様とすることもできる。なお、他の着色剤を実質的に含有しないとは、例えば、着色剤の全量(本発明の色素多量体と、他の着色剤との合計質量)に対し、0.1質量%以下が好ましく、0.05質量%以下がより好ましく、他の着色剤を含有しないことが一層好ましい。 When the coloring composition of the present invention contains other coloring agent, the content of the other coloring agent is preferably 10 to 70% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the coloring composition. The upper limit is more preferably 60% by mass or less, and still more preferably 50% by mass or less. The lower limit is more preferably 20% by mass or more, and further preferably 25% by mass or more.
Moreover, the coloring composition of this invention can also be set as the aspect which does not contain other coloring agents substantially. Note that “substantially free of other colorants” means, for example, preferably 0.1% by mass or less with respect to the total amount of the colorants (total mass of the dye multimer of the present invention and other colorants). 0.05 mass% or less is more preferable, and it is still more preferable not to contain other colorants.
本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂を含むことが好ましい。樹脂は、例えば、顔料などを組成物中で分散させる用途、バインダーの用途で配合される。なお、主に顔料などの着色剤を分散させるために用いられる樹脂を分散剤ともいう。ただし、樹脂のこのような用途は一例であって、このような用途以外の目的で使用することもできる。 << Resin >>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably contains a resin. The resin is blended, for example, for the purpose of dispersing a pigment or the like in the composition and the purpose of a binder. A resin used mainly for dispersing a colorant such as a pigment is also referred to as a dispersant. However, such use of the resin is an example, and the resin can be used for purposes other than such use.
本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂として分散剤を含むことが好ましい。分散剤は、酸性分散剤を少なくとも含むことが好ましく、酸性分散剤のみであることがより好ましい。分散剤が、酸性分散剤を少なくとも含むことにより、顔料の分散性が向上し、輝度ムラが生じにくくなる。更には、優れた現像性が得られるので、フォトリソグラフィにて、好適にパターン形成を行うことができる。なお、分散剤が酸性分散剤のみであるとは、例えば、分散剤の全質量中における、酸性分散剤の含有量が99質量%以上であることが好ましく、99.9質量%以上とすることもできる。 <<< Dispersant >>>
It is preferable that the coloring composition of this invention contains a dispersing agent as resin. The dispersant preferably includes at least an acidic dispersant, and more preferably only an acidic dispersant. When the dispersant includes at least an acidic dispersant, the dispersibility of the pigment is improved and luminance unevenness is less likely to occur. Furthermore, since excellent developability can be obtained, pattern formation can be suitably performed by photolithography. In addition, it is preferable that content of an acidic dispersing agent is 99 mass% or more in the total mass of a dispersing agent, for example that a dispersing agent is only an acidic dispersing agent, and shall be 99.9 mass% or more. You can also.
また、塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)とは、塩基性基の量が酸基の量よりも多い樹脂を表す。塩基性分散剤(塩基性樹脂)は、酸基の量と塩基性基の量の合計量を100モル%としたときに、塩基性基の量が50モル%以上を占める樹脂が好ましい。塩基性分散剤が有する塩基性基は、アミンが好ましい。
酸性分散剤(酸性樹脂)の酸価は、40~105mgKOH/gが好ましく、50~105mgKOH/gがより好ましく、60~105mgKOH/gがさらに好ましい。 Here, the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of acid groups is larger than the amount of basic groups. The acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of acid groups occupies 70 mol% or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%. A resin consisting only of groups is more preferred. The acid group possessed by the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably a carboxyl group.
The basic dispersant (basic resin) represents a resin in which the amount of basic groups is larger than the amount of acid groups. The basic dispersant (basic resin) is preferably a resin in which the amount of basic groups accounts for 50 mol% or more when the total amount of acid groups and basic groups is 100 mol%. The basic group possessed by the basic dispersant is preferably an amine.
The acid value of the acidic dispersant (acidic resin) is preferably 40 to 105 mgKOH / g, more preferably 50 to 105 mgKOH / g, and still more preferably 60 to 105 mgKOH / g.
なお、上記分散剤として説明した樹脂は、分散剤以外の用途で使用することもできる。例えば、バインダーとして用いることもできる。 The dispersant is also available as a commercial product. Specific examples thereof include “DA-7301” manufactured by Enomoto Kasei Co., Ltd., “Disperbyk-101 (polyamidoamine phosphate)” manufactured by BYK Chemie, 107 (carboxylic acid). Ester), 110 (copolymer containing an acid group), 111 (phosphate dispersing agent), 130 (polyamide), 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 166, 170 (polymer copolymer), BYK -P104, P105 (high molecular weight unsaturated polycarboxylic acid) "," EFKA 4047, 4050-4165 (polyurethane type), EFKA 4330-4340 (block copolymer), 4400-4402 (modified polyacrylate), 5010 (manufactured by EFKA) Polyester amide), 5765 (high molecular weight polycarboxylate), 6220 Fatty acid polyester), 6745 (phthalocyanine derivative), 6750 (azo pigment derivative) ”,“ Ajispur PB821, PB822, PB880, PB881 ”manufactured by Ajinomoto Fine Techno Co., Ltd.,“ Floren TG-710 (urethane oligomer), Polyflow No. manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd. .50E, No. 300 (acrylic copolymer), “Disparon KS-860, 873SN, 874, # 2150 (aliphatic polycarboxylic acid), # 7004 (polyether ester), DA- 703-50, DA-705, DA-725 ”,“ Demol RN, N (naphthalenesulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), MS, C, SN-B (aromatic sulfonic acid formalin polycondensate), homogenol, manufactured by Kao Corporation L-18 (polymeric polycarboxylic acid), Emulgen 9 0, 930, 935, 985 (polyoxyethylene nonylphenyl ether), acetamine 86 (stearylamine acetate), “Solsperse 5000 (phthalocyanine derivative), 22000 (azo pigment derivative), 13240 (polyester) manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol Co., Ltd. Amine), 3000, 12000, 17000, 20000, 27000 (polymer having a functional part at the end), 24000, 28000, 32000, 38500 (graft type polymer) ”,“ Nikkor T106 (polyoxyethylene) manufactured by Nikko Chemicals Sorbitan monooleate), MYS-IEX (polyoxyethylene monostearate), “Hinoact T-8000E” manufactured by Kawaken Fine Chemical Co., Ltd., “organosiloxane polymer K” manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. “P341”, “EFKA-46, EFKA-47, EFKA-47EA, EFKA polymer 100, EFKA polymer 400, EFKA polymer 401, EFKA polymer 450” manufactured by Morishita Sangyo Co., Ltd., “Disperse Aid 6, manufactured by San Nopco Co., Ltd. Disperse Aid 8, Disperse Aid 15, Disperse Aid 9100 and other polymer dispersants, ADEKA Co., Ltd. “Adeka Pluronic L31, F38, L42, L44, L61, L64, F68, L72, P95, F77, P84, F87, P94, L101, P103, F108, L121, P-123 ”,“ Ionet (trade name) S-20 ”manufactured by Sanyo Kasei Co., Ltd., and the like. Also, Acrybase FFS-6752, Acrybase FFS-187, Acrycure RD-F8, and Cyclomer P can be used.
The resin described as the dispersant can be used for purposes other than the dispersant. For example, it can be used as a binder.
本発明の着色組成物は、樹脂としてアルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有することができる。アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含有することにより、現像性・パターン形成性が向上する。なお、アルカリ可溶性樹脂は、分散剤やバインダーとして用いることもできる。 <<< Alkali-soluble resin >>>
The coloring composition of this invention can contain alkali-soluble resin as resin. By containing an alkali-soluble resin, developability and pattern formation are improved. The alkali-soluble resin can also be used as a dispersant or a binder.
アルカリ可溶性樹脂としては、線状有機高分子重合体であってもよく、分子(好ましくは、アクリル系共重合体、スチレン系共重合体を主鎖とする分子)中に少なくとも1つのアルカリ可溶性を促進する基を有するアルカリ可溶性樹脂の中から適宜選択することができる。 The molecular weight of the alkali-soluble resin is not particularly defined, but the weight average molecular weight (Mw) is preferably 5000 to 100,000. The number average molecular weight (Mn) is preferably 1000 to 20,000.
The alkali-soluble resin may be a linear organic polymer, and has at least one alkali-soluble polymer in a molecule (preferably a molecule having an acrylic copolymer or a styrene copolymer as a main chain). It can be suitably selected from alkali-soluble resins having groups to promote.
アルカリ可溶性を促進する基(以下、酸基ともいう)としては、例えば、カルボキシル基、リン酸基、スルホン酸基、フェノール性ヒドロキシル基などが挙げられるが、有機溶剤に可溶で弱アルカリ水溶液により現像可能なものが好ましく、(メタ)アクリル酸が特に好ましいものとして挙げられる。これら酸基は、1種のみであってもよいし、2種以上であってもよい。 The alkali-soluble resin is preferably a polyhydroxystyrene resin, a polysiloxane resin, an acrylic resin, an acrylamide resin, or an acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resin from the viewpoint of heat resistance. Acrylic resins, acrylamide resins, and acrylic / acrylamide copolymer resins are preferred.
Examples of the group that promotes alkali solubility (hereinafter also referred to as an acid group) include a carboxyl group, a phosphoric acid group, a sulfonic acid group, and a phenolic hydroxyl group. What can be developed is preferable, and (meth) acrylic acid is particularly preferable. These acid groups may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
本発明の着色組成物は、溶剤を含有することが好ましい。溶剤は有機溶剤が好ましい。溶剤は、各成分の溶解性や着色組成物の塗布性を満足すれば特に制限はない。 << Solvent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a solvent. The solvent is preferably an organic solvent. The solvent is not particularly limited as long as the solubility of each component and the coating property of the coloring composition are satisfied.
本発明の着色組成物は、硬化性化合物を含有する。硬化性化合物としては、ラジカル、酸、熱により架橋可能な公知の化合物を用いることができる。例えば、エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基、環状エーテル(エポキシ、オキセタン)基、メチロール基等を有する化合物が挙げられる。エチレン性不飽和結合を有する基としては、ビニル基、(メタ)アリル基、(メタ)アクリロイル基などが挙げられる。
本発明において、硬化性化合物は、重合性化合物が好ましく、ラジカル重合性化合物がより好ましい。 << Curable compound >>
The coloring composition of the present invention contains a curable compound. As the curable compound, known compounds that can be cross-linked by radicals, acids, and heat can be used. For example, a compound having a group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond, a cyclic ether (epoxy, oxetane) group, a methylol group and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the group having an ethylenically unsaturated bond include a vinyl group, a (meth) allyl group, and a (meth) acryloyl group.
In the present invention, the curable compound is preferably a polymerizable compound, and more preferably a radical polymerizable compound.
本発明において、重合性化合物は、例えば、モノマー、プレポリマー、すなわち2量体、3量体及びオリゴマー、又はそれらの混合物並びにそれらの多量体などの化学的形態のいずれであってもよい。重合性化合物が光ラジカル重合性化合物の場合は、モノマーが好ましい。
重合性化合物の分子量は、100~3000が好ましい。上限は、2000以下が好ましく、1500以下が更に好ましい。下限は、150以上が好ましく、250以上が更に好ましい。
重合性化合物は、3~15官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることが好ましく、3~6官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物であることがより好ましい。これらの具体的な化合物としては、特開2009-288705号公報の段落番号0095~0108、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0227、特開2008-292970号公報の段落番号0254~0257に記載の化合物を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 (Polymerizable compound)
In the present invention, the polymerizable compound may be in a chemical form such as a monomer, a prepolymer, that is, a dimer, a trimer and an oligomer, or a mixture thereof and a multimer thereof. When the polymerizable compound is a radical photopolymerizable compound, a monomer is preferable.
The molecular weight of the polymerizable compound is preferably 100 to 3000. The upper limit is preferably 2000 or less, and more preferably 1500 or less. The lower limit is preferably 150 or more, and more preferably 250 or more.
The polymerizable compound is preferably a 3 to 15 functional (meth) acrylate compound, more preferably a 3 to 6 functional (meth) acrylate compound. Specific examples of these compounds include those described in paragraph Nos. 0095 to 0108 in JP-A-2009-288705, paragraph 0227 in JP-A-2013-29760, and paragraph numbers 0254 to 0257 in JP-A-2008-292970. Compounds can be taken into account, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
カプロラクトン構造を有する重合性化合物は、例えば、日本化薬(株)からKAYARAD DPCAシリーズとして市販されており、DPCA-20、DPCA-30、DPCA-60、DPCA-120等が挙げられる。 The polymerizable compound is also preferably a compound having a caprolactone structure.
Examples of the polymerizable compound having a caprolactone structure are commercially available from Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd. as the KAYARAD DPCA series, and examples thereof include DPCA-20, DPCA-30, DPCA-60, DPCA-120 and the like.
市販品としては、ウレタンオリゴマーUAS-10、UAB-140(山陽国策パルプ社製)、UA-7200(新中村化学工業社製)、DPHA-40H(日本化薬社製)、UA-306H、UA-306T、UA-306I、AH-600、T-600、AI-600(共栄社化学(株)製)などが挙げられる。 Examples of the polymerizable compound include urethane acrylates described in JP-B-48-41708, JP-A-51-37193, JP-B-2-32293, JP-B-2-16765, Urethane compounds having an ethylene oxide skeleton described in JP-B-58-49860, JP-B-56-17654, JP-B-62-39417, and JP-B-62-39418 are also suitable. Further, addition polymerizable compounds having an amino structure or a sulfide structure in the molecule described in JP-A-63-277653, JP-A-63-260909, and JP-A-1-105238 are used. Is also preferable.
Commercially available products include urethane oligomers UAS-10, UAB-140 (manufactured by Sanyo Kokusaku Pulp Co., Ltd.), UA-7200 (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.), DPHA-40H (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.), UA-306H, UA -306T, UA-306I, AH-600, T-600, AI-600 (manufactured by Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) and the like.
また、重合性化合物の含有量は、硬化性化合物の全質量に対して、10~100質量%が好ましく、30~100質量%がより好ましい。 When a polymerizable compound is used as the curable compound, the content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 0.1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the composition. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more. For example, the upper limit is more preferably 45% by mass or less, and still more preferably 40% by mass or less. One curable compound may be used alone, or two or more curable compounds may be used in combination. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
The content of the polymerizable compound is preferably 10 to 100% by mass, more preferably 30 to 100% by mass, based on the total mass of the curable compound.
本発明では、硬化性化合物として、エポキシ基を有する化合物を用いることもできる。エポキシ基を有する化合物としては、1分子内にエポキシ基を2つ以上有する化合物が好ましい。エポキシ基は、1分子内に2~100個有することが好ましい。上限は、例えば、10個以下とすることもでき、5個以下とすることもできる。 (Compound having an epoxy group)
In the present invention, a compound having an epoxy group can also be used as the curable compound. As the compound having an epoxy group, a compound having two or more epoxy groups in one molecule is preferable. It is preferable to have 2 to 100 epoxy groups in one molecule. For example, the upper limit may be 10 or less, and may be 5 or less.
脂肪族環を有する化合物の場合、エポキシ基は、脂肪族環に直接結合(単結合)してなる化合物が好ましい。芳香族環を有する化合物の場合、エポキシ基は、芳香族環に、連結基を介して結合してなる化合物が好ましい。連結基は、アルキレン基、または、アルキレン基と-O-との組み合わせからなる基が好ましい。
また、エポキシ基を有する化合物は、2以上の芳香族環が炭化水素基で連結した構造を有する化合物を用いることもできる。炭化水素基は、炭素数1~6のアルキレン基が好ましい。エポキシ基は、上記連結基を介して連結していることが好ましい。 In the present invention, the compound having an epoxy group preferably has a structure having an aromatic ring and / or an aliphatic ring, and more preferably has a structure having an aliphatic ring. The epoxy group is preferably bonded to the aromatic ring and / or the aliphatic ring via a single bond or a linking group. Examples of the linking group include an alkylene group, an arylene group, —O—, —NR ′ — (R ′ represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, or an aryl group which may have a substituent. And a group containing at least one selected from —SO 2 —, —CO—, —O—, and —S—.
In the case of a compound having an aliphatic ring, the epoxy group is preferably a compound formed by directly bonding (single bond) to the aliphatic ring. In the case of a compound having an aromatic ring, the epoxy group is preferably a compound formed by bonding to an aromatic ring via a linking group. The linking group is preferably an alkylene group or a group comprising a combination of an alkylene group and —O—.
Moreover, the compound which has an epoxy group can also use the compound which has a structure which two or more aromatic rings connected with the hydrocarbon group. The hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms. It is preferable that the epoxy group is connected via the connecting group.
また、エポキシ基を有する化合物の含有量は、硬化性化合物の全質量に対して、1~80質量%が好ましく、1~50質量%がより好ましい。
また、重合性化合物とエポキシ基を有する化合物とを併用する場合、重合性化合物と、エポキシ基を有する化合物との質量比は、重合性化合物:エポキシ基を有する化合物=100:1~100:400が好ましく、100:1~100:100がより好ましい。 When a compound having an epoxy group is used as the curable compound, the content of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 0.1 to 40% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition. For example, the lower limit is more preferably 0.5% by mass or more, and further preferably 1% by mass or more. For example, the upper limit is more preferably 30% by mass or less, and still more preferably 20% by mass or less. The compound which has an epoxy group may be single 1 type, and may use 2 or more types together. When using 2 or more types together, it is preferable that a total amount becomes the said range.
The content of the compound having an epoxy group is preferably 1 to 80% by mass and more preferably 1 to 50% by mass with respect to the total mass of the curable compound.
When the polymerizable compound and the compound having an epoxy group are used in combination, the mass ratio of the polymerizable compound and the compound having an epoxy group is such that the polymerizable compound: the compound having an epoxy group = 100: 1 to 100: 400. Is preferable, and 100: 1 to 100: 100 is more preferable.
本発明の着色組成物は、重合性化合物の反応を促進させたり、硬化温度を下げる目的で、硬化促進剤を添加してもよい。硬化促進剤としては、分子内に2個以上のメルカプト基を有する多官能チオール化合物などが挙げられる。多官能チオール化合物は安定性、臭気、解像性、現像性、密着性等の改良を目的として添加してもよい。多官能チオール化合物は、2級のアルカンチオール類であることが好ましく、特に下記一般式(T1)で表される構造を有する化合物であることが好ましい。
一般式(T1)
In the colored composition of the present invention, a curing accelerator may be added for the purpose of promoting the reaction of the polymerizable compound or lowering the curing temperature. Examples of the curing accelerator include polyfunctional thiol compounds having two or more mercapto groups in the molecule. The polyfunctional thiol compound may be added for the purpose of improving stability, odor, resolution, developability, adhesion and the like. The polyfunctional thiol compound is preferably a secondary alkanethiol, and particularly preferably a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (T1).
General formula (T1)
本発明の着色組成物は、さらに光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。光重合開始剤としては、重合性化合物の重合を開始する能力を有する限り、特に制限はなく、公知の光重合開始剤の中から適宜選択することができる。例えば、紫外線領域から可視領域の光線に対して感光性を有するものが好ましい。また、光励起された増感剤と何らかの作用を生じ、活性ラジカルを生成する活性剤であってもよく、モノマーの種類に応じてカチオン重合を開始させるような開始剤であってもよい。また、光重合開始剤は、約300nm~800nm(330nm~500nmがより好ましい。)の範囲内に少なくとも約50の分子吸光係数を有する化合物を、少なくとも1種含有していることが好ましい。 << photopolymerization initiator >>
The colored composition of the present invention preferably further contains a photopolymerization initiator. The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it has the ability to initiate polymerization of the polymerizable compound, and can be appropriately selected from known photopolymerization initiators. For example, those having photosensitivity to light in the ultraviolet region to the visible region are preferable. Further, it may be an activator that generates some action with a photoexcited sensitizer and generates an active radical, or may be an initiator that initiates cationic polymerization according to the type of monomer. The photopolymerization initiator preferably contains at least one compound having a molecular extinction coefficient of at least about 50 within a range of about 300 nm to 800 nm (more preferably 330 nm to 500 nm).
ヒドロキシアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、IRGACURE-184、DAROCUR-1173、IRGACURE-500、IRGACURE-2959,IRGACURE-127(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤としては、市販品であるIRGACURE-907、IRGACURE-369、及び、IRGACURE-379(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。アミノアセトフェノン系開始剤として、365nm又は405nm等の長波光源に吸収波長がマッチングされた特開2009-191179号公報に記載の化合物も用いることができる。また、アシルホスフィン系開始剤としては市販品であるIRGACURE-819やDAROCUR-TPO(商品名:いずれもBASF社製)を用いることができる。 As the photopolymerization initiator, hydroxyacetophenone compounds, aminoacetophenone compounds, and acylphosphine compounds can also be suitably used. More specifically, for example, aminoacetophenone initiators described in JP-A-10-291969 and acylphosphine oxide initiators described in Japanese Patent No. 4225898 can also be used.
As the hydroxyacetophenone-based initiator, IRGACURE-184, DAROCUR-1173, IRGACURE-500, IRGACURE-2959, IRGACURE-127 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, commercially available products IRGACURE-907, IRGACURE-369, and IRGACURE-379 (trade names: all manufactured by BASF) can be used. As the aminoacetophenone-based initiator, compounds described in JP-A-2009-191179 whose absorption wavelength is matched with a long wave light source of 365 nm or 405 nm can also be used. As the acylphosphine initiator, commercially available products such as IRGACURE-819 and DAROCUR-TPO (trade names: both manufactured by BASF) can be used.
光重合開始剤の具体例としては、例えば、特開2013-29760号公報の段落0265~0268を参酌することができ、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 In particular, when the colored composition of the present invention is used for the production of a color filter of a solid-state imaging device, it is necessary to form a fine pattern with a sharp shape. It is important that it be developed. From such a viewpoint, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as the photopolymerization initiator. In particular, when a fine pattern is formed in a solid-state imaging device, a stepper exposure machine is used for curing exposure, but this exposure machine may be damaged by halogen, and the amount of photopolymerization initiator added must be kept low. Therefore, in view of these points, it is particularly preferable to use an oxime compound as a photopolymerization initiator for forming a fine pattern such as a solid-state imaging device. Further, the use of an oxime compound can improve the color transfer.
As specific examples of the photopolymerization initiator, for example, paragraphs 0265 to 0268 of JP2013-29760A can be referred to, and the contents thereof are incorporated in the present specification.
市販品ではIRGACURE-OXE01(BASF社製)、IRGACURE-OXE02(BASF社製)も好適に用いられる。また、TRONLY TR-PBG-304、TRONLY TR-PBG-309、TRONLY TR-PBG-305(常州強力電子新材料有限公司(CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO.,LTD)製)、アデカアークルズNCI-930(ADEKA社製)も用いることができる。 Examples of oxime compounds include J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 1653-1660), J.M. C. S. Perkin II (1979) pp. 156-162, Journal of Photopolymer Science and Technology (1995), pp. 156-162. 202-232, compounds described in JP-A No. 2000-66385, compounds described in JP-A Nos. 2000-80068, JP-T 2004-534797, JP-A No. 2006-342166, and the like.
As commercially available products, IRGACURE-OXE01 (manufactured by BASF) and IRGACURE-OXE02 (manufactured by BASF) are also preferably used. Also, TRONLY TR-PBG-304, TRONLY TR-PBG-309, TRONLY TR-PBG-305 (manufactured by CHANGZHOU TRONLY NEW ELECTRONIC MATERIALS CO., LTD), Adeka Arcles 30 (Made by ADEKA) can also be used.
一般式(OX-1)中、Rで表される一価の置換基としては、一価の非金属原子団であることが好ましい。
一価の非金属原子団としては、アルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、複素環基、アルキルチオカルボニル基、アリールチオカルボニル基等が挙げられる。また、これらの基は、1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。また、前述した置換基は、さらに他の置換基で置換されていてもよい。
置換基としてはハロゲン原子、アリールオキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基またはアリールオキシカルボニル基、アシルオキシ基、アシル基、アルキル基、アリール基等が挙げられる。
一般式(OX-1)中、Bで表される一価の置換基としては、アリール基、複素環基、アリールカルボニル基、又は、複素環カルボニル基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。
一般式(OX-1)中、Aで表される二価の有機基としては、炭素数1~12のアルキレン基、アルキニレン基が好ましい。これらの基は1以上の置換基を有していてもよい。置換基としては、前述した置換基が例示できる。 In general formula (OX-1), R and B each independently represent a monovalent substituent, A represents a divalent organic group, and Ar represents an aryl group.
In the general formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by R is preferably a monovalent nonmetallic atomic group.
Examples of the monovalent nonmetallic atomic group include an alkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a heterocyclic group, an alkylthiocarbonyl group, and an arylthiocarbonyl group. Moreover, these groups may have one or more substituents. Moreover, the substituent mentioned above may be further substituted by another substituent.
Examples of the substituent include a halogen atom, an aryloxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group, an acyloxy group, an acyl group, an alkyl group, and an aryl group.
In General Formula (OX-1), the monovalent substituent represented by B is preferably an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an arylcarbonyl group, or a heterocyclic carbonyl group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
In the general formula (OX-1), the divalent organic group represented by A is preferably an alkylene group having 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an alkynylene group. These groups may have one or more substituents. Examples of the substituent include the above-described substituents.
光重合開始剤は、必要に応じて2種以上を組み合わせて使用しても良い。 The molar extinction coefficient at 365 nm or 405 nm of the oxime compound is preferably 1,000 to 300,000, more preferably 2,000 to 300,000, more preferably 5,000 to 200,000 from the viewpoint of sensitivity. 000 is particularly preferred. For the measurement of the molar extinction coefficient of the compound, a known method can be used. Specifically, for example, an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (Cary-5 spectrophotometer manufactured by Varian) is used and an ethyl acetate solvent is used. It is preferable to measure at a concentration of 0.01 g / L.
You may use a photoinitiator in combination of 2 or more type as needed.
本発明の着色組成物は、顔料誘導体を含有することができる。顔料誘導体としては、有機顔料の一部分を、酸性基、塩基性基又はフタルイミドメチル基で置換した構造を有する化合物が挙げられる。顔料誘導体を構成するための有機顔料としては、ジケトピロロピロール系顔料、アゾ系顔料、フタロシアニン系顔料、アントラキノン系顔料、キナクリドン系顔料、ジオキサジン系顔料、ペリノン系顔料、ペリレン系顔料、チオインジゴ系顔料、イソインドリン系顔料、イソインドリノン系顔料、キノフタロン系顔料、スレン系顔料、金属錯体系顔料等が挙げられる。また、顔料誘導体が有する酸性基としては、スルホン酸基、カルボン酸基及びその4級アンモニウム塩基が好ましく、カルボン酸基及びスルホン酸基がさらに好ましく、スルホン酸基が特に好ましい。顔料誘導体が有する塩基性基としては、アミノ基が好ましく、特に三級アミノ基が好ましい。顔料誘導体の具体例としては、特開2011-252065号公報の段落0162~0183の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 << Pigment derivative >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a pigment derivative. Examples of the pigment derivative include compounds having a structure in which a part of an organic pigment is substituted with an acidic group, a basic group, or a phthalimidomethyl group. Examples of the organic pigment for constituting the pigment derivative include diketopyrrolopyrrole pigments, azo pigments, phthalocyanine pigments, anthraquinone pigments, quinacridone pigments, dioxazine pigments, perinone pigments, perylene pigments, thioindigo pigments , Isoindoline pigments, isoindolinone pigments, quinophthalone pigments, selenium pigments, metal complex pigments, and the like. Moreover, as an acidic group which a pigment derivative has, a sulfonic acid group, a carboxylic acid group, and its quaternary ammonium base are preferable, a carboxylic acid group and a sulfonic acid group are more preferable, and a sulfonic acid group is especially preferable. The basic group possessed by the pigment derivative is preferably an amino group, particularly preferably a tertiary amino group. As specific examples of the pigment derivative, the description in paragraphs 0162 to 0183 of JP2011-252065 A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
本発明の着色組成物は、塗布性をより向上させる観点から、各種の界面活性剤を含有させてもよい。界面活性剤としては、フッ素系界面活性剤、ノニオン系界面活性剤、カチオン系界面活性剤、アニオン系界面活性剤、シリコーン系界面活性剤などの各種界面活性剤を使用できる。 << Surfactant >>
The colored composition of the present invention may contain various surfactants from the viewpoint of further improving coatability. As the surfactant, various surfactants such as a fluorine-based surfactant, a nonionic surfactant, a cationic surfactant, an anionic surfactant, and a silicone-based surfactant can be used.
フッ素系界面活性剤としては、フッ素原子を有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、アルキレンオキシ基(好ましくはエチレンオキシ基、プロピレンオキシ基)を2以上(好ましくは5以上)有する(メタ)アクリレート化合物に由来する繰り返し単位と、を含む含フッ素高分子化合物も好ましく用いることができ、下記化合物も本発明で用いられるフッ素系界面活性剤として例示される。
フッ素系界面活性剤としては、エチレン性不飽和基を側鎖に有する含フッ素重合体を用いることもできる。具体例としては、特開2010-164965号公報0050~0090段落および0289~0295段落に記載された化合物、例えばDIC社製のメガファックRS-101、RS-102、RS-718K等が挙げられる。 Examples of the fluorosurfactant include Megafac F171, F172, F173, F176, F176, F177, F141, F142, F143, F144, R30, F437, F475, F479, F482, F554, F780, RS-72-K (above DIC Corporation), Florard FC430, FC431, FC171 (above, Sumitomo 3M Limited), Surflon S-382, SC -101, SC-103, SC-104, SC-105, SC-1068, SC-381, SC-383, S393, K393, KH-40 (above, manufactured by Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.), PF636, PF656, PF6320, PF6520, PF7002 (above, the product made by OMNOVA) etc. are mentioned. As the fluorine-based surfactant, compounds described in paragraphs 0015 to 0158 of JP-A No. 2015-117327 can also be used. A block polymer can also be used as the fluorosurfactant, and specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A-2011-89090.
The fluorine-based surfactant has a repeating unit derived from a (meth) acrylate compound having a fluorine atom and 2 or more (preferably 5 or more) alkyleneoxy groups (preferably ethyleneoxy group or propyleneoxy group) (meta). ) A fluorine-containing polymer compound containing a repeating unit derived from an acrylate compound can also be preferably used, and the following compounds are also exemplified as the fluorine-based surfactant used in the present invention.
As the fluorosurfactant, a fluoropolymer having an ethylenically unsaturated group in the side chain can also be used. Specific examples thereof include compounds described in JP-A 2010-164965, paragraphs 0050 to 0090 and paragraphs 0289 to 0295, such as MegaFac RS-101, RS-102, and RS-718K manufactured by DIC.
界面活性剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.001~2.0質量%が好ましく、0.005~1.0質量%がより好ましい。 Only one type of surfactant may be used, or two or more types may be combined.
The content of the surfactant is preferably 0.001 to 2.0% by mass, more preferably 0.005 to 1.0% by mass, based on the total solid content of the coloring composition.
本発明の着色組成物は、シランカップリング剤を含有することができる。シランカップリング剤としては、一分子中に少なくとも2種の反応性の異なる官能基を有するシラン化合物も好ましく、特に、官能基としてアミノ基とアルコキシ基とを有するものが好ましい。このようなシランカップリング剤としては、例えば、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-メチルジメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製、商品名 KBM-602)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-トリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製、商品名 KBM-603)、N-β-アミノエチル-γ-アミノプロピル-トリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製、商品名 KBE-602)、γ-アミノプロピル-トリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製、商品名 KBM-903)、γ-アミノプロピル-トリエトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製、商品名 KBE-903)、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン(信越化学工業社製、商品名 KBM-503)等がある。シランカップリング剤の詳細については、特開2013-254047号公報の段落番号0155~0158の記載を参酌でき、この内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。 << Silane coupling agent >>
The coloring composition of the present invention can contain a silane coupling agent. As the silane coupling agent, silane compounds having at least two types of functional groups having different reactivity in one molecule are also preferable, and those having an amino group and an alkoxy group as functional groups are particularly preferable. Examples of such silane coupling agents include N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-methyldimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-β-aminoethyl-γ- Aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-603, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), N-β-aminoethyl-γ-aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name KBE-602, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), γ -Aminopropyl-trimethoxysilane (trade name KBM-903, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), γ-aminopropyl-triethoxysilane (trade name: KBE-903, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), 3-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxy Silane (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd., trade name KBM-503) and the like. For details of the silane coupling agent, the description of paragraph numbers 0155 to 0158 in JP2013-254047A can be referred to, the contents of which are incorporated herein.
本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を含有することも好ましい。重合禁止剤としては、ハイドロキノン、p-メトキシフェノール、ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ピロガロール、t-ブチルカテコール、ベンゾキノン、4,4'-チオビス(3-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、2,2'-メチレンビス(4-メチル-6-t-ブチルフェノール)、N-ニトロソフェニルヒドロキシアミン塩(アンモニウム塩、第一セリウム塩等)等が挙げられる。
本発明の着色組成物が重合禁止剤を含有する場合、重合禁止剤の含有量は、着色組成物の全固形分に対して、0.01~5質量%が好ましい。本発明の着色組成物は、重合禁止剤を1種類のみ含んでいてもよいし、2種類以上含んでいてもよい。2種類以上含む場合は、その合計量が上記範囲となることが好ましい。 << Polymerization inhibitor >>
The coloring composition of the present invention preferably contains a polymerization inhibitor. Polymerization inhibitors include hydroquinone, p-methoxyphenol, di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pyrogallol, t-butylcatechol, benzoquinone, 4,4′-thiobis (3-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), 2,2′-methylenebis (4-methyl-6-t-butylphenol), N-nitrosophenylhydroxyamine salt (ammonium salt, primary cerium salt, etc.) and the like.
When the colored composition of the present invention contains a polymerization inhibitor, the content of the polymerization inhibitor is preferably 0.01 to 5% by mass with respect to the total solid content of the colored composition. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain only one type of polymerization inhibitor, or may contain two or more types. When two or more types are included, the total amount is preferably within the above range.
本発明の着色組成物には、必要に応じて、各種添加物、例えば、充填剤、密着促進剤、酸化防止剤、紫外線吸収剤、凝集防止剤等を配合することができる。これらの添加物としては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0155~0156に記載のものを挙げることができ、これらの内容は本明細書に組み込まれる。酸化防止剤としては、例えばフェノール化合物、リン系化合物(例えば特開2011-90147 0042段落に記載の化合物)、チオエーテル化合物などを用いることができる。市販品としては、例えば(株)ADEKA製のアデカスタブシリーズ(AO-20、AO-30、AO-40、AO-50、AO-50F、AO-60、AO-60G、AO-80、AO-330など)が挙げられる。酸化防止剤は2種以上を混合して使用してもよい。本発明の着色組成物においては、特開2004-295116号公報の段落0078に記載の増感剤や光安定剤、同公報の段落0081に記載の熱重合防止剤を含有することができる。 << Other additives >>
Various additives, for example, fillers, adhesion promoters, antioxidants, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-aggregation agents, and the like can be blended with the colored composition of the present invention as necessary. Examples of these additives include those described in JP-A No. 2004-295116, paragraphs 0155 to 0156, the contents of which are incorporated herein. As the antioxidant, for example, a phenol compound, a phosphorus compound (for example, a compound described in paragraph No. 2011-90147 paragraph), a thioether compound, or the like can be used. Examples of commercially available products include ADEKA Corporation's ADK STAB series (AO-20, AO-30, AO-40, AO-50, AO-50F, AO-60, AO-60G, AO-80, AO- 330). Two or more antioxidants may be mixed and used. The coloring composition of the present invention may contain a sensitizer and a light stabilizer described in paragraph 0078 of JP-A No. 2004-295116 and a thermal polymerization inhibitor described in paragraph 0081 of the same publication.
本発明の着色組成物は、前述の成分を混合して調製できる。配合する際の投入順序や作業条件は特に制約を受けない。例えば、全成分を同時に溶剤に溶解・分散して組成物を調製してもよいし、必要に応じては、各成分を適宜2つ以上の溶液または分散液としておいて、使用時(塗布時)にこれらを混合して調製してもよい。 <Method for preparing colored composition>
The coloring composition of the present invention can be prepared by mixing the aforementioned components. There are no particular restrictions on the order of injection and working conditions when blending. For example, the composition may be prepared by dissolving and dispersing all components in a solvent at the same time. If necessary, each component is suitably used as two or more solutions or dispersions at the time of use (at the time of application). ) May be prepared by mixing them.
フィルタの孔径は、0.01~7.0μm程度が適しており、好ましくは0.01~3.0μm程度、さらに好ましくは0.05~0.5μm程度である。この範囲とすることにより、後工程において均一な組成物の調製や平滑な膜の形成などを阻害する、微細な異物を確実に除去することが可能となる。また、ファイバ状のろ材を用いることも好ましく、ろ材としては例えばポリプロピレンファイバ、ナイロンファイバ、グラスファイバ等が挙げられ、具体的にはロキテクノ社製のSBPタイプシリーズ(SBP008など)、TPRタイプシリーズ(TPR002、TPR005など)、SHPXタイプシリーズ(SHPX003など)のフィルタカートリッジを用いることができる。 In preparation of the coloring composition, it is preferable to filter with a filter for the purpose of removing foreign substances or reducing defects. Any filter can be used without particular limitation as long as it has been conventionally used for filtration. For example, fluororesin such as polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyamide resin such as nylon (eg nylon-6, nylon-6,6), polyolefin resin such as polyethylene and polypropylene (PP) (high density, ultra high molecular weight) And a filter using a material such as polyolefin resin). Among these materials, polypropylene (including high density polypropylene) and nylon are preferable.
The pore size of the filter is suitably about 0.01 to 7.0 μm, preferably about 0.01 to 3.0 μm, more preferably about 0.05 to 0.5 μm. By setting it within this range, it becomes possible to reliably remove fine foreign matters that hinder the preparation of a uniform composition and the formation of a smooth film in the subsequent steps. Further, it is also preferable to use a fiber-shaped filter medium, and examples of the filter medium include polypropylene fiber, nylon fiber, glass fiber, and the like. , TPR005, etc.) and SHPX type series (SHPX003 etc.) filter cartridges can be used.
また、上述した範囲内で異なる孔径の第1のフィルタを組み合わせてもよい。ここでの孔径は、フィルタメーカーの公称値を参照することができる。市販のフィルタとしては、例えば、日本ポール株式会社(DFA4201NXEYなど)、アドバンテック東洋株式会社、日本インテグリス株式会社(旧日本マイクロリス株式会社)又は株式会社キッツマイクロフィルタ等が提供する各種フィルタの中から選択することができる。
第2のフィルタは、上述した第1のフィルタと同様の材料等で形成されたものを使用することができる。
例えば、第1のフィルタでのフィルタリングは、分散液のみで行い、他の成分を混合した後で、第2のフィルタリングを行ってもよい。 When using filters, different filters may be combined. At that time, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only once or may be performed twice or more.
Moreover, you may combine the 1st filter of a different hole diameter within the range mentioned above. The pore diameter here can refer to the nominal value of the filter manufacturer. As a commercially available filter, for example, selected from various filters provided by Nippon Pole Co., Ltd. (DFA4201NXEY, etc.), Advantech Toyo Co., Ltd., Japan Integris Co., Ltd. (formerly Nihon Microlith Co., Ltd.) can do.
As the second filter, a filter formed of the same material as the first filter described above can be used.
For example, the filtering by the first filter may be performed only with the dispersion, and the second filtering may be performed after mixing other components.
次に、本発明の色素多量体を説明する。
本発明の色素多量体は、上述した式(I-1)または式(I-2)で表される色素構造を有する色素多量体である。式(I-1)および式(I-2)の詳細については、上述した着色組成物で説明した範囲と同様である。 <Dye multimer>
Next, the dye multimer of the present invention will be described.
The dye multimer of the present invention is a dye multimer having a dye structure represented by the above formula (I-1) or formula (I-2). The details of the formula (I-1) and the formula (I-2) are the same as those described in the above-described coloring composition.
色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)と、数平均分子量(Mn)との比〔(Mw)/(Mn)〕は1.0~2.0であることが好ましく、1.1~1.8であることがさらに好ましく、1.1~1.5であることが特に好ましい。
なお、本発明において、色素多量体の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)測定によるポリスチレン換算値であり、具体的には、後述する実施例に記載の方法で測定した値である。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the dye multimer is preferably 2000 to 50000. The lower limit is more preferably 3000 or more, and further preferably 6000 or more. The upper limit is more preferably 30000 or less, and still more preferably 20000 or less. By satisfying the above range, it is easy to produce a cured film in which color unevenness and defects are suppressed.
The ratio [(Mw) / (Mn)] of the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the dye multimer is preferably 1.0 to 2.0, and 1.1 to 1. 8 is more preferable, and 1.1 to 1.5 is particularly preferable.
In addition, in this invention, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of a pigment | dye multimer is a polystyrene conversion value by a gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement, Specifically, the value measured by the method as described in the Example mentioned later. It is.
次に、本発明のカラーフィルタについて説明する。
本発明のカラーフィルタは、上述した本発明の着色組成物を用いてなるものである。本発明のカラーフィルタは、CCD(電荷結合素子)やCMOS(相補型金属酸化膜半導体)などの固体撮像素子や、画像表示装置などに用いることができる。 <Color filter>
Next, the color filter of the present invention will be described.
The color filter of the present invention is formed using the above-described colored composition of the present invention. The color filter of the present invention can be used for solid-state imaging devices such as CCD (charge coupled device) and CMOS (complementary metal oxide semiconductor), image display devices, and the like.
また、着色パターン(着色画素)のサイズ(パターン幅)としては、2.5μm以下が好ましく、2.0μm以下がより好ましく、1.7μm以下が特に好ましい。下限は、例えば0.1μm以上とすることができ、0.2μm以上とすることもできる。 The film thickness of the colored pattern (colored pixel) in the color filter of the present invention is preferably 2.0 μm or less, more preferably 1.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more.
Further, the size (pattern width) of the colored pattern (colored pixel) is preferably 2.5 μm or less, more preferably 2.0 μm or less, and particularly preferably 1.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more.
本発明のパターン形成方法は、本発明の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法またはドライエッチング法により、着色組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程と、を含む。 <Pattern formation method>
The pattern forming method of the present invention includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition of the present invention, and a pattern is formed on the colored composition layer by a photolithography method or a dry etching method. And a step of performing.
また、ドライエッチング法によるパターン形成は、着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成し、硬化して硬化物層を形成する工程と、硬化物層上にフォトレジスト層を形成する工程と、露光および現像することによりフォトレジスト層をパターニングしてレジストパターンを得る工程と、レジストパターンをエッチングマスクとして硬化物層をドライエッチングしてパターンを形成する工程とを含むことが好ましい。以下、各工程について説明する。 Pattern formation by the photolithography method includes a step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using a colored composition, a step of exposing the colored composition layer in a pattern, and developing and removing an unexposed portion. Forming the step. If necessary, a step of baking the colored composition layer (pre-bake step) and a step of baking the developed pattern (post-bake step) may be provided.
In addition, pattern formation by the dry etching method includes forming a colored composition layer on a support using a colored composition and curing to form a cured product layer, and forming a photoresist layer on the cured product layer. It is preferable to include a step of patterning the photoresist layer by exposure and development to obtain a resist pattern, and a step of forming a pattern by dry etching the cured product layer using the resist pattern as an etching mask. Hereinafter, each step will be described.
硬化性組成物層を形成する工程では、着色組成物を用いて、支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する。 << Step of Forming Colored Composition Layer >>
In the step of forming the curable composition layer, the colored composition layer is formed on the support using the colored composition.
本発明におけるパターンは、固体撮像素子用基板の固体撮像素子形成面側(おもて面)に形成してもよいし、固体撮像素子非形成面側(裏面)に形成してもよい。
支持体上には、必要により、上部の層との密着改良、物質の拡散防止或いは基板表面の平坦化のために下塗り層を設けてもよい。 As the support, for example, a solid-state image sensor substrate in which a solid-state image sensor (light receiving element) such as a CCD or CMOS is provided on a substrate (for example, a silicon substrate) can be used.
The pattern in the present invention may be formed on the solid-state image sensor formation surface side (front surface) of the solid-state image sensor substrate, or may be formed on the solid-state image sensor non-formation surface side (back surface).
If necessary, an undercoat layer may be provided on the support for improving adhesion with the upper layer, preventing diffusion of substances, or flattening the substrate surface.
プリベークを行う場合、プリベーク温度は、150℃以下が好ましく、120℃以下がより好ましく、110℃以下が更に好ましい。下限は、例えば、50℃以上とすることができ、80℃以上とすることもできる。プリベーク温度を150℃以下で行うことにより、例えば、イメージセンサの光電変換膜を有機素材で構成した場合において、これらの特性をより効果的に維持することができる。
プリベーク時間は、10秒~300秒が好ましく、40~250秒がより好ましく、80~220秒がさらに好ましい。乾燥は、ホットプレート、オーブン等で行うことができる。 The colored composition layer formed on the support may be dried (prebaked). When a pattern is formed by a low temperature process, pre-baking may not be performed.
When performing prebaking, the prebaking temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower, and further preferably 110 ° C. or lower. For example, the lower limit may be 50 ° C. or higher, and may be 80 ° C. or higher. By performing the pre-baking temperature at 150 ° C. or lower, for example, when the photoelectric conversion film of the image sensor is made of an organic material, these characteristics can be more effectively maintained.
The prebake time is preferably 10 seconds to 300 seconds, more preferably 40 to 250 seconds, and even more preferably 80 to 220 seconds. Drying can be performed with a hot plate, oven, or the like.
<<露光工程>>
次に、着色組成物層を、パターン状に露光する(露光工程)。例えば、着色組成物層に対し、ステッパー等の露光装置を用いて、所定のマスクパターンを有するマスクを介して露光することで、パターン露光することができる。これにより、露光部分を硬化することができる。
露光に際して用いることができる放射線(光)としては、g線、i線等の紫外線が好ましく(特に好ましくはi線)用いられる。照射量(露光量)は、例えば、0.03~2.5J/cm2が好ましく、0.05~1.0J/cm2がより好ましい。
露光時における酸素濃度については適宜選択することができ、大気下で行う他に、例えば酸素濃度が19体積%以下の低酸素雰囲気下(例えば、15体積%、5体積%、実質的に無酸素)で露光してもよく、酸素濃度が21体積%を超える高酸素雰囲気下(例えば、22体積%、30体積%、50体積%)で露光してもよい。また、露光照度は適宜設定することが可能であり、通常1000W/m2~100000W/m2(例えば、5000W/m2、15000W/m2、35000W/m2)の範囲から選択することができる。酸素濃度と露光照度は適宜条件を組み合わせてよく、例えば、酸素濃度10体積%で照度10000W/m2、酸素濃度35体積%で照度20000W/m2などとすることができる。
硬化膜の膜厚は2.0μm以下が好ましく、1.0μm以下がより好ましく、0.7μm以下がさらに好ましい。下限は、例えば0.1μm以上とすることができ、0.2μm以上とすることもできる。膜厚を、2.0μm以下とすることにより、高解像性、高密着性が得られ易い。 (When forming a pattern by photolithography)
<< Exposure process >>
Next, the colored composition layer is exposed in a pattern (exposure process). For example, pattern exposure can be performed by exposing the coloring composition layer through a mask having a predetermined mask pattern using an exposure apparatus such as a stepper. Thereby, an exposed part can be hardened.
As radiation (light) that can be used for exposure, ultraviolet rays such as g-line and i-line are preferable (particularly preferably i-line). Irradiation dose (exposure dose), for example, preferably 0.03 ~ 2.5J / cm 2, more preferably 0.05 ~ 1.0J / cm 2.
The oxygen concentration at the time of exposure can be appropriately selected. In addition to being performed in the atmosphere, for example, in a low oxygen atmosphere having an oxygen concentration of 19% by volume or less (for example, 15% by volume, 5% by volume, substantially oxygen-free). ), Or in a high oxygen atmosphere (for example, 22% by volume, 30% by volume, 50% by volume) with an oxygen concentration exceeding 21% by volume. Further, the exposure illuminance can be set as appropriate, and can usually be selected from the range of 1000 W / m 2 to 100,000 W / m 2 (for example, 5000 W / m 2 , 15000 W / m 2 , 35000 W / m 2 ). . Oxygen concentration and exposure illuminance may appropriately combined conditions, for example, illuminance 10000 W / m 2 at an oxygen concentration of 10 vol%, oxygen concentration of 35 vol% can be such illuminance 20000W / m 2.
The thickness of the cured film is preferably 2.0 μm or less, more preferably 1.0 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.7 μm or less. The lower limit can be, for example, 0.1 μm or more, and can also be 0.2 μm or more. By setting the film thickness to 2.0 μm or less, high resolution and high adhesion can be easily obtained.
次に、未露光部を現像除去してパターンを形成する。未露光部の現像除去は、現像液を用いて行うことができる。これにより、露光工程における未露光部の着色組成物層が現像液に溶出し、光硬化した部分だけが残る。
現像液としては、下地の固体撮像素子や回路などにダメージを起さない、有機アルカリ現像液が望ましい。
現像液の温度は、例えば、20~30℃が好ましい。現像時間は、20~180秒が好ましい。また、残渣除去性を向上するため、現像液を60秒ごとに振り切り、さらに新たに現像液を供給する工程を数回繰り返してもよい。 << Development process >>
Next, the unexposed portion is developed and removed to form a pattern. The development removal of the unexposed portion can be performed using a developer. Thereby, the coloring composition layer of the unexposed part in an exposure process elutes in a developing solution, and only the photocured part remains.
As the developer, an organic alkali developer that does not damage the underlying solid-state imaging device or circuit is desirable.
The temperature of the developer is preferably 20 to 30 ° C., for example. The development time is preferably 20 to 180 seconds. Moreover, in order to improve residue removability, the process of shaking off the developer every 60 seconds and supplying a new developer may be repeated several times.
また、現像液には無機アルカリを用いてもよい。無機アルカリとしては、例えば、水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、炭酸水素ナトリウム、ケイ酸ナトリウム、メタケイ酸ナトリウムなどが好ましい。
また、現像液には、界面活性剤を用いてもよい。界面活性剤の例としては、上述した硬化性組成物で説明した界面活性剤が挙げられ、ノニオン系界面活性剤が好ましい。
なお、このようなアルカリ性水溶液からなる現像液を使用した場合には、一般に現像後純水で洗浄(リンス)することが好ましい。 Examples of the alkaline agent used in the developer include ammonia water, ethylamine, diethylamine, dimethylethanolamine, tetramethylammonium hydroxide, tetraethylammonium hydroxide, tetrapropylammonium hydroxide, tetrabutylammonium hydroxide, benzyltrimethylammonium hydroxide. And organic alkaline compounds such as dimethylbis (2-hydroxyethyl) ammonium hydroxide, choline, pyrrole, piperidine, 1,8-diazabicyclo- [5.4.0] -7-undecene. As the developer, an alkaline aqueous solution obtained by diluting these alkaline agents with pure water is preferably used. The concentration of the alkaline agent in the alkaline aqueous solution is preferably 0.001 to 10% by mass, and more preferably 0.01 to 1% by mass.
Moreover, you may use an inorganic alkali for a developing solution. As the inorganic alkali, for example, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, sodium hydrogen carbonate, sodium silicate, sodium metasilicate and the like are preferable.
Further, a surfactant may be used for the developer. Examples of the surfactant include the surfactant described in the above-described curable composition, and a nonionic surfactant is preferable.
In addition, when using the developing solution which consists of such alkaline aqueous solution, generally it is preferable to wash | clean (rinse) with a pure water after image development.
ポストベークは、現像後の膜を、上記条件になるようにホットプレートやコンベクションオーブン(熱風循環式乾燥機)、高周波加熱機等の加熱手段を用いて、連続式あるいはバッチ式で行うことができる。また、低温プロセスによりパターンを形成する場合は、ポストベークは行わなくてもよい。 After the development, after drying, a heat treatment (post-bake) can be performed. Post-baking is a heat treatment after development for complete film curing. In the case of performing post-baking, the post-baking temperature is preferably 100 to 240 ° C., for example. From the viewpoint of film curing, 200 to 230 ° C. is more preferable. In addition, when an organic electroluminescence (organic EL) element is used as the light source, or when the photoelectric conversion film of the image sensor is made of an organic material, the post-bake temperature is preferably 150 ° C. or lower, more preferably 120 ° C. or lower. Preferably, 100 ° C. or lower is more preferable, and 90 ° C. or lower is particularly preferable. The lower limit can be, for example, 50 ° C. or higher.
Post-baking can be carried out continuously or batchwise using a heating means such as a hot plate, a convection oven (hot air circulation dryer), a high-frequency heater, etc., so that the film after development is in the above-mentioned condition. . Further, when a pattern is formed by a low temperature process, post baking is not necessary.
ドライエッチング法でのパターン形成は、支持体上に形成した着色組成物層を硬化して硬化物層を形成し、次いで、得られた硬化物層にパターニングされたフォトレジスト層を形成し、このフォトレジスト層をマスクとしてエッチングガスを用いてエッチングするなどの方法でことができる。
具体的には、硬化物層上にポジ型またはネガ型の感放射線性組成物を塗布し、これを乾燥させることによりフォトレジスト層を形成することが好ましい。フォトレジスト層の形成においては、さらにプリベーク処理を施すことが好ましい。特に、フォトレジストの形成プロセスとしては、露光後の加熱処理、現像後の加熱処理(ポストベーク処理)を実施する形態が望ましい。 (When pattern is formed by dry etching method)
In the pattern formation by the dry etching method, the colored composition layer formed on the support is cured to form a cured product layer, and then a patterned photoresist layer is formed on the obtained cured product layer. Etching with an etching gas using the photoresist layer as a mask can be used.
Specifically, it is preferable to form a photoresist layer by applying a positive or negative radiation sensitive composition on the cured product layer and drying it. In the formation of the photoresist layer, it is preferable to further perform a pre-bake treatment. In particular, as a process for forming a photoresist, a mode in which heat treatment after exposure and heat treatment after development (post-bake treatment) are desirable.
フッ素系ガスと酸素ガス(O2)との混合ガスを用い、支持体が露出しない領域(深さ)までエッチングを行なう第1段階のエッチングと、この第1段階のエッチングの後に、窒素ガス(N2)と酸素ガス(O2)との混合ガスを用い、好ましくは支持体が露出する領域(深さ)付近までエッチングを行なう第2段階のエッチングと、支持体が露出した後に行なうオーバーエッチングとを含む方法が好ましい。以下、ドライエッチングの具体的手法、並びに第1段階のエッチング、第2段階のエッチング、およびオーバーエッチングについて説明する。 The dry etching is preferably performed by the following method from the viewpoint of forming the pattern cross section closer to a rectangle and reducing damage to the support.
Using a mixed gas of fluorine-based gas and oxygen gas (O 2 ), the first stage etching is performed up to a region (depth) where the support is not exposed, and after this first stage etching, nitrogen gas ( N 2 ) and oxygen gas (O 2 ), and a second stage etching is preferably performed to the vicinity of the region (depth) where the support is exposed, and over-etching is performed after the support is exposed. Is preferred. Hereinafter, a specific method of dry etching and the first stage etching, second stage etching, and over-etching will be described.
(1)第1段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)と、第2段階のエッチングにおけるエッチングレート(nm/min)とをそれぞれ算出する。
(2)第1段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間と、第2段階のエッチングで所望の厚さをエッチングする時間とをそれぞれ算出する。
(3)上述した(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第1段階のエッチングを実施する。
(4)上述した(2)で算出したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施する。あるいはエンドポイント検出でエッチング時間を決定し、決定したエッチング時間に従って第2段階のエッチングを実施してもよい。
(5)上述した(3)および(4)の合計時間に対してオーバーエッチング時間を算出し、オーバーエッチングを実施する。 Dry etching is performed by obtaining etching conditions in advance by the following method.
(1) The etching rate (nm / min) in the first stage etching and the etching rate (nm / min) in the second stage etching are calculated respectively.
(2) The time for etching the desired thickness in the first stage etching and the time for etching the desired thickness in the second stage etching are respectively calculated.
(3) The first-stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above.
(4) The second-stage etching is performed according to the etching time calculated in (2) above. Alternatively, the etching time may be determined by endpoint detection, and the second stage etching may be performed according to the determined etching time.
(5) The overetching time is calculated with respect to the total time of (3) and (4) described above, and overetching is performed.
本発明の固体撮像素子は、本発明のカラーフィルタを有する。本発明の固体撮像素子の構成としては、本発明におけるカラーフィルタが備えられた構成であり、固体撮像素子として機能する構成であれば特に限定はないが、例えば、以下のような構成が挙げられる。 <Solid-state imaging device>
The solid-state imaging device of the present invention has the color filter of the present invention. The configuration of the solid-state imaging device of the present invention is a configuration provided with the color filter in the present invention, and is not particularly limited as long as it is a configuration that functions as a solid-state imaging device. .
さらに、上記デバイス保護膜上であってカラーフィルタの下(支持体に近い側)に集光手段(例えば、マイクロレンズ等。以下同じ)を有する構成や、カラーフィルタ上に集光手段を有する構成等であってもよい。 A transfer electrode made of a plurality of photodiodes and polysilicon constituting a light receiving area of a solid-state imaging device (CCD image sensor, CMOS image sensor, etc.) is provided on a support, and the photodiode and the transfer electrode are provided on the support. A light-shielding film made of tungsten or the like having an opening only in the light-receiving portion of the photodiode, and a device protection film made of silicon nitride or the like formed on the light-shielding film so as to cover the entire surface of the light-shielding film and the photodiode light-receiving portion. This is a configuration having the color filter of the present invention on the device protective film.
Further, a configuration having a light condensing means (for example, a microlens, etc., the same applies hereinafter) on the device protective film and under the color filter (on the side close to the support), or a structure having the light condensing means on the color filter Etc.
本発明のカラーフィルタは、液晶表示装置や有機エレクトロルミネッセンス表示装置などの、画像表示装置に用いることができる。本発明のカラーフィルタを備えた画像表示装置は、表示画像の色合いが良好で表示特性に優れた高画質画像を表示することができる。表示装置の定義や各表示装置の詳細については、例えば「電子ディスプレイデバイス(佐々木 昭夫著、(株)工業調査会 1990年発行)」、「ディスプレイデバイス(伊吹 順章著、産業図書(株)平成元年発行)」などに記載されている。また、液晶表示装置については、例えば「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術(内田 龍男編集、(株)工業調査会 1994年発行)」に記載されている。本発明が適用できる液晶表示装置に特に制限はなく、例えば、上記の「次世代液晶ディスプレイ技術」に記載されている色々な方式の液晶表示装置に適用できる。 <Image display device>
The color filter of the present invention can be used in an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic electroluminescence display device. The image display device provided with the color filter of the present invention can display a high-quality image having a good display color and excellent display characteristics. For the definition of display devices and details of each display device, refer to, for example, “Electronic Display Devices (Akio Sasaki, published by Industrial Research Institute 1990)”, “Display Devices (Junaki Ibuki, Industrial Books Co., Ltd.) Issued in the first year). The liquid crystal display device is described in, for example, “Next-generation liquid crystal display technology (edited by Tatsuo Uchida, published by Kogyo Kenkyukai 1994)”. The liquid crystal display device to which the present invention can be applied is not particularly limited, and can be applied to, for example, various types of liquid crystal display devices described in the “next generation liquid crystal display technology”.
バックライトに関しては、SID meeting Digest 1380(2005)(A.Konno et al.)や、月刊ディスプレイ 2005年12月号の18~24ページ(島 康裕)、同25~30ページ(八木隆明)などに記載されている。 In addition to the color filter of the present invention, the liquid crystal display device provided with the color filter of the present invention includes various members such as an electrode substrate, a polarizing film, a retardation film, a backlight, a spacer, and a viewing angle compensation film. The color filter of the present invention can be applied to a liquid crystal display device composed of these known members. Regarding these components, for example, “'94 Liquid Crystal Display Peripheral Materials / Chemicals Market (Kentaro Shima CMC 1994)”, “2003 Liquid Crystal Related Markets Current Status and Future Prospects (Volume 2)” Fuji Chimera Research Institute, Ltd., published in 2003) ”.
Regarding backlights, SID meeting Digest 1380 (2005) (A. Konno et al.), Monthly Display December 2005, 18-24 pages (Yasuhiro Shima), 25-30 pages (Takaaki Yagi), etc. Are listed.
重量平均分子量は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィ(GPC)測定によるポリスチレン換算値で測定した。
カラムの種類:TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-Hと、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000と、TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000とを連結したカラム
展開溶媒:テトラヒドロフラン
カラム温度:40℃
流量(サンプル注入量):1.0μL(サンプル濃度:0.1質量%)
装置名:東ソー製 HLC-8220GPC
検出器:RI(屈折率)検出器
検量線ベース樹脂:ポリスチレン <Measurement of weight average molecular weight>
The weight average molecular weight was measured in terms of polystyrene by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) measurement.
Column type: TOSOH TSKgel Super HZM-H, TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ4000, and TOSOH TSKgel Super HZ2000 linked column developing solvent: Tetrahydrofuran Column temperature: 40 ° C
Flow rate (sample injection amount): 1.0 μL (sample concentration: 0.1% by mass)
Device name: HLC-8220GPC manufactured by Tosoh Corporation
Detector: RI (refractive index) detector Calibration curve Base resin: Polystyrene
(合成例1) 色素単量体(X-1)の合成 <Synthesis example>
(Synthesis Example 1) Synthesis of Dye Monomer (X-1)
また、特開2015-30742号公報の段落0372に記載の方法と同様にして、中間体cを合成した。中間体cの11.2g、中間体dの10.0gを塩化メチレン200mL中、室温で2時間攪拌した。次に水100mLを添加し分液した。油層を濃縮した後、シリカゲルを用いたカラムクロマトグラフィで精製し、色素単量体(X-2)を15.5g得た。 Intermediate d was obtained in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 1 except that p-chloromethylstyrene was changed to ethyl iodide.
Intermediate c was synthesized in the same manner as in the method described in paragraph 0372 of JP-A-2015-30742. 11.2 g of intermediate c and 10.0 g of intermediate d were stirred in 200 mL of methylene chloride at room temperature for 2 hours. Next, 100 mL of water was added for liquid separation. The oil layer was concentrated and purified by column chromatography using silica gel to obtain 15.5 g of a dye monomer (X-2).
色素単量体(X-1)を、色素多量体(X-2)に変更した以外は、合成例8と同様の操作を行い、色素多量体(S-2)を合成した。 (Synthesis Example 9) Dye multimer (S-2)
A dye multimer (S-2) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 8 except that the dye monomer (X-1) was changed to the dye multimer (X-2).
色素単量体(X-1)を、色素多量体(X-4)に変更した以外は、合成例8と同様の操作を行い、色素多量体(S-3)を合成した。 Synthesis Example 10 Dye Multimer (S-3)
The dye multimer (S-3) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 8 except that the dye monomer (X-1) was changed to the dye multimer (X-4).
色素単量体(X-1)を、色素多量体(X-5)に変更した以外は、合成例8と同様の操作を行い、色素多量体(S-4)を合成した。 (Synthesis Example 11) Dye multimer (S-4)
A dye multimer (S-4) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 8 except that the dye monomer (X-1) was changed to the dye multimer (X-5).
色素単量体(X-1)を、色素多量体(X-6)に変更した以外は、合成例8と同様の操作を行い、色素多量体(S-5)を合成した。 (Synthesis Example 12) Dye multimer (S-5)
A dye multimer (S-5) was synthesized in the same manner as in Synthesis Example 8 except that the dye monomer (X-1) was changed to the dye multimer (X-6).
(下塗り層用レジスト液の調製)
下記の成分を混合して溶解し、下塗り層用レジスト液を調製した。
‐下塗り層用レジスト液の組成-
・溶剤(PGMEA): 19.20部
・溶剤(乳酸エチル): 36.67部
・アルカリ可溶性樹脂(メタクリル酸ベンジル/メタクリル酸/メタクリル酸-2-ヒドロキシエチル共重合体(モル比=60/22/18、重量平均分子量15,000、数平均分子量9,000)の40%PGMEA溶液): 30.51部
・硬化性化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬製)): 12.20部
・重合禁止剤(p-メトキシフェノール): 0.0061部
・フッ素系界面活性剤(メガファックF475、DIC製): 0.83部
・光重合開始剤(トリハロメチルトリアジン系の光重合開始剤、TAZ-107、みどり化学製): 0.586部 <Test Example 1> Pattern formation using photolithography (preparation of resist solution for undercoat layer)
The following components were mixed and dissolved to prepare an undercoat layer resist solution.
-Composition of resist solution for undercoat layer-
Solvent (PGMEA): 19.20 parts Solvent (ethyl lactate): 36.67 parts Alkali-soluble resin (benzyl methacrylate / methacrylic acid-2-hydroxyethyl methacrylate copolymer (molar ratio = 60/22) / 18, 40% PGMEA solution having a weight average molecular weight of 15,000 and a number average molecular weight of 9,000)): 30.51 parts. Curable compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku)): 12 20 parts-Polymerization inhibitor (p-methoxyphenol): 0.0061 parts-Fluorosurfactant (Megafac F475, manufactured by DIC): 0.83 parts-Photopolymerization initiator (trihalomethyltriazine-based photopolymerization) Initiator, TAZ-107, manufactured by Midori Chemical): 0.586 parts
直径6インチ(1インチ=25.4mm)のシリコンウエハをオーブン中で200℃のもと30分加熱処理した。次いで、このシリコンウエハ上に、上記下塗り用レジスト液を乾燥膜厚が1.5μmになるように塗布し、さらに220℃のオーブン中で1時間加熱乾燥させて下塗り層を形成し、下塗り層付シリコンウエハ基板を得た。 (Preparation of silicon wafer substrate with undercoat layer)
A silicon wafer having a diameter of 6 inches (1 inch = 25.4 mm) was heat-treated in an oven at 200 ° C. for 30 minutes. Next, the undercoat resist solution is applied onto the silicon wafer so as to have a dry film thickness of 1.5 μm, and further heated and dried in an oven at 220 ° C. for 1 hour to form an undercoat layer. A silicon wafer substrate was obtained.
<<顔料分散液1の調製>>
顔料分散液1を、以下のようにして調製した。
C.I.ピグメントグリーン36を13.0部(緑色顔料、平均粒子サイズ55nm)、および顔料分散剤(Disperbyk-111、BYKChemie社製)を5.0部、PGMEA82.0部からなる混合液を、ビーズミル(ジルコニアビーズ0.3mm径)により3時間混合および分散して、顔料分散液を調製した。その後さらに、減圧機構付き高圧分散機NANO-3000-10(日本ビーイーイー(株)製)を用いて、2000kg/cm3の圧力下で流量500g/分として分散処理を行なった。この分散処理を10回繰り返し、顔料分散液1(顔料濃度13%)を得た。
得られた顔料分散液1について、顔料の粒子サイズを動的光散乱法(Microtrac Nanotrac UPA-EX150(日機装社(Nikkiso Co., Ltd.)製))により測定したところ、24nmであった。 (Preparation of coloring composition)
<< Preparation of Pigment Dispersion Liquid 1 >>
Pigment dispersion 1 was prepared as follows.
C. I. A mixed solution comprising 13.0 parts of pigment green 36 (green pigment, average particle size 55 nm), 5.0 parts of pigment dispersant (Disperbyk-111, manufactured by BYK Chemie), and 82.0 parts of PGMEA was added to a bead mill (zirconia). A pigment dispersion was prepared by mixing and dispersing for 3 hours using beads having a diameter of 0.3 mm. Thereafter, dispersion treatment was further performed at a flow rate of 500 g / min under a pressure of 2000 kg / cm 3 using a high-pressure disperser NANO-3000-10 (manufactured by Nippon BEE Co., Ltd.) with a decompression mechanism. This dispersion treatment was repeated 10 times to obtain a pigment dispersion 1 (pigment concentration 13%).
With respect to the obtained pigment dispersion 1, the particle size of the pigment was measured by a dynamic light scattering method (Microtrac Nanotrac UPA-EX150 (manufactured by Nikkiso Co., Ltd.)) to be 24 nm.
顔料分散液1において、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36の代わりに、C.I.ピグメントレッド254を用いた以外は、顔料分散液1と同様にして、顔料分散液2を調製した。顔料分散液2の粒子サイズは、26nmであった。 << Preparation of Pigment Dispersion 2 >>
In pigment dispersion 1, C.I. I. In place of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment dispersion 2 was prepared in the same manner as pigment dispersion 1, except that Pigment Red 254 was used. The particle size of Pigment Dispersion Liquid 2 was 26 nm.
顔料分散液1において、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36の代わりに、C.I.ピグメントグリーン58を用いた以外は、顔料分散液1と同様にして、顔料分散液3を調製した。顔料分散液3の粒子サイズは、29nmであった。 << Preparation of pigment dispersion 3 >>
In pigment dispersion 1, C.I. I. In place of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment dispersion 3 was prepared in the same manner as pigment dispersion 1, except that CI Pigment Green 58 was used. The particle size of Pigment Dispersion Liquid 3 was 29 nm.
顔料分散液1において、C.I.ピグメントグリーン36の代わりに、C.I.ピグメントグリーン59を用いた以外は、顔料分散液1と同様にして、顔料分散液4を調製した。顔料分散液4の粒子サイズは、24nmであった。 << Preparation of pigment dispersion 4 >>
In pigment dispersion 1, C.I. I. In place of Pigment Green 36, C.I. I. Pigment dispersion 4 was prepared in the same manner as pigment dispersion 1, except that CI Pigment Green 59 was used. The particle size of the pigment dispersion 4 was 24 nm.
下記の各成分を混合して分散、溶解し、0.45μmナイロンフィルタでろ過することにより、着色組成物を得た。
‐組成-
・色素(下記表に記載の化合物): 固形分として0.040部
・下記表に記載の顔料を含む顔料分散液(顔料濃度13.0%): 0.615部
・シクロヘキサノン: 100部
・アルカリ可溶性樹脂(下記J1またはJ2:下記表に記載の化合物): 5部
・ソルスパース20000(1%シクロヘキサン溶液、日本ルーブリゾール製): 1部
・光重合開始剤(下記(I-1)~(I-8):下記表に記載の化合物): 1部
・硬化性化合物(ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、KAYARAD DPHA(日本化薬製)): 10部
・グリセロールプロポキシレート(1%シクロヘキサン溶液): 0.1部 <Preparation of coloring composition>
The following components were mixed, dispersed, dissolved, and filtered through a 0.45 μm nylon filter to obtain a colored composition.
-composition-
-Dye (compound described in the following table): 0.040 parts as a solid content-Pigment dispersion containing the pigment described in the following table (pigment concentration: 13.0%): 0.615 parts-Cyclohexanone: 100 parts-Alkali Soluble resin (the following J1 or J2: compounds described in the following table): 5 parts Solsperse 20000 (1% cyclohexane solution, manufactured by Nippon Lubrizol): 1 part Photopolymerization initiator (the following (I-1) to (I -8): Compounds described in the following table): 1 part curable compound (dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, KAYARAD DPHA (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku)): 10 parts glycerol propoxylate (1% cyclohexane solution): 0. 1 copy
上記のように調製した各着色組成物を、下塗り層付シリコンウエハ基板の下塗り層上に塗布し、組成物層(塗布膜)を形成した。着色組成物の塗布量は、乾燥膜厚が0.6μmとなる塗布量とした。次に、この塗布膜を100℃のホットプレートを用いて120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行なった。プリベーク後の基板を24時間室温で放置(経時)した。 (Production of color filter)
Each colored composition prepared as described above was applied onto the undercoat layer of the silicon wafer substrate with the undercoat layer to form a composition layer (coating film). The coating amount of the coloring composition was set to a coating amount at which the dry film thickness was 0.6 μm. Next, this coating film was heat-treated (pre-baked) for 120 seconds using a hot plate at 100 ° C. The substrate after pre-baking was allowed to stand at room temperature for 24 hours (aging).
<色ムラ>
着色組成物をガラス基板に塗布して塗布膜を形成した。着色組成物の塗布量は、乾燥膜厚が0.7μmとなる塗布量とした。次に、塗布膜に対して100℃のホットプレートを用いて120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行なった。これを24時間室温で放置した後、マスクを使用しなかった以外は、カラーフィルタの作製方法と同様の方法で露光を行い、サンプル(着色層付きのガラス基板)を製造した。サンプルの輝度分布を下記方法で測定し、平均からのずれが±5%以内である画素が全画素数に占める割合をもとに色ムラの評価を行った。輝度分布の測定方法は、サンプルを顕微鏡MX-50(オリンパス社製)にて撮影した画像により行った。なお輝度分布において、最も画素数の多い輝度を平均輝度と定義した。下記表の色ムラの欄に、平均からのずれが±5%以内である画素の割合(%)を記す。 (Performance evaluation)
<Color unevenness>
The colored composition was applied to a glass substrate to form a coating film. The coating amount of the coloring composition was set to a coating amount at which the dry film thickness was 0.7 μm. Next, the coating film was subjected to heat treatment (pre-baking) for 120 seconds using a hot plate at 100 ° C. After leaving this at room temperature for 24 hours, a sample (a glass substrate with a colored layer) was produced by performing exposure in the same manner as the method for producing a color filter except that a mask was not used. The luminance distribution of the sample was measured by the following method, and the color unevenness was evaluated based on the ratio of the pixels whose deviation from the average is within ± 5% to the total number of pixels. The luminance distribution was measured using an image obtained by photographing the sample with a microscope MX-50 (Olympus). In the luminance distribution, the luminance with the largest number of pixels is defined as the average luminance. In the column of color unevenness in the table below, the ratio (%) of pixels whose deviation from the average is within ± 5% is described.
得られたカラーフィルタのパターン形状をSEM(scanning electron microscope)で観察した。
A:パターンのゆがみや表面荒れがない。
B:パターンのゆがみや表面荒れがあり、実用上問題がある。 <Pattern shape>
The pattern shape of the obtained color filter was observed with SEM (scanning electron microscope).
A: No pattern distortion or surface roughness.
B: The pattern is distorted and the surface is rough.
パターン200個をSEMで観察し、パターン欠損の有無を確認した。パターン欠損が多いほど歩留まりに悪影響を及ぼす。パターン欠損の発生した個数を下記表に記す。 <Pattern loss>
200 patterns were observed with an SEM to confirm the presence or absence of pattern defects. The more pattern defects, the worse the yield. The number of pattern defects is shown in the table below.
各着色組成物を、下塗り層付シリコンウエハ基板の下塗り層上に塗布し、塗布膜を形成した。着色組成物の塗布量は、乾燥膜厚が0.6μmとなる塗布量とした。次に、この塗布膜を100℃のホットプレートを用いて120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行なった。この基板を24時間室温で放置(経時)したのち、アプライドマテリアルズ社製ComPlusにて欠陥数(個数/cm2)を測定した。欠陥数が少ないほど良好である。
Each coloring composition was apply | coated on the undercoat layer of the silicon wafer substrate with an undercoat layer, and the coating film was formed. The coating amount of the coloring composition was set to a coating amount at which the dry film thickness was 0.6 μm. Next, this coating film was heat-treated (pre-baked) for 120 seconds using a hot plate at 100 ° C. After standing the substrate at room temperature for 24 hours (with time) was measured and the number of defects (number / cm 2) at Applied Materials Inc. ComPlus. The smaller the number of defects, the better.
これに対し、比較例は、色ムラおよび欠陥が劣っていた。さらには、パターン形状が劣り、パターン欠損も多かった。 As is clear from the above table, in the colored compositions of the examples, the occurrence of color unevenness and defects was suppressed even after aging after pre-baking. Furthermore, the pattern shape was good and there were few pattern defects.
On the other hand, the comparative example was inferior in color unevenness and defects. Furthermore, the pattern shape was inferior and there were many pattern defects.
(着色組成物の調製)
下記成分を混合・溶解して、着色組成物を得た。
-組成-
・シクロヘキサノン: 1.133部
・色素(下記表に記載の化合物): 固形分として0.040部
・下記表に記載の顔料を含む顔料分散液(顔料濃度13.0%): 0.615部
・硬化性化合物(EHPE-3150((株)ダイセル製、2,2-ビス(ヒドロキシメチル)-1-ブタノールの1,2-エポキシ-4-(2-オキシラニル)シクロヘキサン付加物)): 0.070部
・グリセロールプロポキシレート(1%シクロヘキサン溶液): 0.048部 <Test Example 2> Pattern formation applying dry etching method (preparation of coloring composition)
The following components were mixed and dissolved to obtain a colored composition.
-composition-
Cyclohexanone: 1.133 parts Dye (compound described in the following table): 0.040 part as solid content Pigment dispersion containing pigment described in the following table (pigment concentration: 13.0%): 0.615 part Curable compound (EHPE-3150 (manufactured by Daicel Corporation, 2,2-epoxy-4- (2-oxiranyl) cyclohexane adduct of 2,2-bis (hydroxymethyl) -1-butanol)): 070 parts glycerol propoxylate (1% cyclohexane solution): 0.048 parts
ガラス基板上に、上記着色組成物を膜厚が0.6μmになるようにスピンコーターを用いて塗布し、100℃のホットプレートを用いて120秒間加熱処理(プリベーク)を行った。これを24時間室温で放置した後、次いで、220℃のホットプレートを用いて300秒間加熱処理(ポストベーク)を行い、硬化膜を作製した。
この硬化膜上にポジ型フォトレジスト「FHi622BC」(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ製)を塗布し、プリベークを実施し、膜厚0.8μmのフォトレジスト層を形成した。続いて、フォトレジスト層を、i線ステッパー(キャノン製)を用い、350mJ/cm2の露光量でパターン露光し、フォトレジスト層の温度または雰囲気温度が90℃となる温度で1分間、加熱処理を行なった。その後、フォトレジスト剥離液「MS230C」(富士フイルムエレクトロニクスマテリアルズ製)を使用して120秒間、剥離処理を実施してレジストパターンを除去し、さらに純水による洗浄、スピン乾燥を実施した。その後、100℃で2分間の脱水ベーク処理を行った。
次に、ドライエッチングを以下の手順で行った。 (Production of color filter)
On the glass substrate, the said coloring composition was apply | coated using the spin coater so that the film thickness might be set to 0.6 micrometer, and the heat processing (prebaking) were performed for 120 second using a 100 degreeC hotplate. This was left at room temperature for 24 hours, and then heat-treated (post-baked) for 300 seconds using a 220 ° C. hot plate to prepare a cured film.
A positive photoresist “FHi622BC” (manufactured by FUJIFILM Electronics Materials) was applied on the cured film and prebaked to form a photoresist layer having a thickness of 0.8 μm. Subsequently, the photoresist layer is subjected to pattern exposure using an i-line stepper (manufactured by Canon) at an exposure amount of 350 mJ / cm 2 , and heat treatment is performed for 1 minute at a temperature at which the temperature of the photoresist layer or the atmospheric temperature becomes 90 ° C. Was done. Thereafter, a resist stripping process was performed for 120 seconds using a photoresist stripping solution “MS230C” (manufactured by Fuji Film Electronics Materials) to remove the resist pattern, and further cleaning with pure water and spin drying were performed. Thereafter, a dehydration baking process was performed at 100 ° C. for 2 minutes.
Next, dry etching was performed according to the following procedure.
試験例1と同様の方法で、色ムラ、パターン形状、パターン欠損および欠陥を評価した。結果を下記表に記す。
In the same manner as in Test Example 1, color unevenness, pattern shape, pattern defect and defect were evaluated. The results are shown in the table below.
これに対し、比較例は、色ムラおよび欠陥が劣っていた。さらには、パターン形状が劣り、パターン欠損も多かった。 As is clear from the above table, in the colored compositions of the examples, the occurrence of color unevenness and defects was suppressed even after aging after pre-baking. Furthermore, the pattern shape was good and there were few pattern defects.
On the other hand, the comparative example was inferior in color unevenness and defects. Furthermore, the pattern shape was inferior and there were many pattern defects.
Claims (15)
- 色素多量体と、硬化性化合物とを含む着色組成物であって、
前記色素多量体は、2以上のヘテロ原子を含み、かつ、前記ヘテロ原子の1以上が窒素原子であるカチオン性ヘテロ環に、アゾ基または芳香族環基が結合した構造を有する色素構造を含む、着色組成物。 A coloring composition comprising a dye multimer and a curable compound,
The dye multimer includes a dye structure having a structure in which an azo group or an aromatic ring group is bonded to a cationic heterocycle containing two or more heteroatoms and one or more of the heteroatoms being a nitrogen atom. , Coloring composition. - 前記カチオン性ヘテロ環が、下記式(I)で表わされる、請求項1に記載の着色組成物;
式(I)
Formula (I)
- 前記色素構造は、式(Ia)で表される、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物;
Lは、-N=N-、または、アリーレン基を表し、
Bは、置換基を表し、
Xはアニオンを表し、
Ht、BおよびXの少なくとも一つが色素多量体を構成する原子団との結合部位を有する。 The coloring composition according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the dye structure is represented by the formula (Ia);
L represents -N = N- or an arylene group,
B represents a substituent,
X represents an anion,
At least one of Ht, B, and X has a binding site with an atomic group constituting a dye multimer. - 前記色素多量体は、式(I-1)で表される色素構造を有する、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物;
- 前記色素多量体は、式(I-2)で表される色素構造を有する、請求項1または2に記載の着色組成物;
- 前記色素多量体は、下記式(A)で表される繰り返し単位、及び、下記式(C)で表される繰り返し単位の少なくとも一つを含んでなるか、又は下記式(D)で表される、請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物;
- 前記色素多量体は、ビス(スルホニル)イミドアニオンまたはトリス(スルホニル)メチルアニオンを有する、請求項1~6のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the dye multimer has a bis (sulfonyl) imide anion or a tris (sulfonyl) methyl anion.
- さらに、顔料を含有する、請求項1~7のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The coloring composition according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising a pigment.
- 前記硬化性化合物が、ラジカル重合性化合物を含み、更に光重合開始剤を含有する、請求項1~8のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 8, wherein the curable compound contains a radical polymerizable compound and further contains a photopolymerization initiator.
- 更に、アルカリ可溶性樹脂を含む、請求項1~9のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物。 The colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 9, further comprising an alkali-soluble resin.
- 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いたカラーフィルタ。 A color filter using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10.
- 請求項1~10のいずれか1項に記載の着色組成物を用いて支持体上に着色組成物層を形成する工程と、フォトリソグラフィ法またはドライエッチング法により、着色組成物層に対してパターンを形成する工程と、を有するパターン形成方法。 A step of forming a colored composition layer on a support using the colored composition according to any one of claims 1 to 10, and a pattern formed on the colored composition layer by a photolithography method or a dry etching method Forming a pattern.
- 請求項11に記載のカラーフィルタを有する固体撮像素子。 A solid-state imaging device having the color filter according to claim 11.
- 請求項11に記載のカラーフィルタを有する画像表示装置。 An image display device having the color filter according to claim 11.
- 下記式(I-1)または式(I-2)で表される色素構造を有する色素多量体;
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2017551852A JP6837988B2 (en) | 2015-11-16 | 2016-11-11 | Coloring compositions, color filters, pattern forming methods, solid-state image sensors, image display devices and dye multimers |
KR1020187012284A KR102152047B1 (en) | 2015-11-16 | 2016-11-11 | Coloring composition, color filter, pattern formation method, solid-state imaging device, image display device, and dye multimer |
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP2015-223662 | 2015-11-16 | ||
JP2015223662 | 2015-11-16 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
WO2017086245A1 true WO2017086245A1 (en) | 2017-05-26 |
Family
ID=58718875
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
PCT/JP2016/083490 WO2017086245A1 (en) | 2015-11-16 | 2016-11-11 | Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, image display device and dye polymer |
Country Status (4)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (1) | JP6837988B2 (en) |
KR (1) | KR102152047B1 (en) |
TW (1) | TWI707922B (en) |
WO (1) | WO2017086245A1 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2018205533A (en) * | 2017-06-05 | 2018-12-27 | 凸版印刷株式会社 | Photosensitive color composition for color filter for solid-state image sensor, color filter and solid-state image sensor |
WO2020022247A1 (en) * | 2018-07-26 | 2020-01-30 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable composition, production method for curable composition, film, color filter, production method for color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device |
WO2020213700A1 (en) * | 2019-04-19 | 2020-10-22 | 学校法人日本大学 | Simple method for detecting nucleic acid sequence, etc. |
JPWO2020235674A1 (en) * | 2019-05-23 | 2020-11-26 |
Families Citing this family (2)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR102659438B1 (en) * | 2019-03-11 | 2024-04-23 | 후지필름 가부시키가이샤 | Coloring composition, cured film, pattern formation method, color filter, solid-state imaging device and image display device |
WO2021029195A1 (en) * | 2019-08-13 | 2021-02-18 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Composition, film, optical filter and method for manufacturing same, solid-state imaging element, infrared sensor, camera module, and compound |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2012162677A (en) * | 2011-02-08 | 2012-08-30 | Fujifilm Corp | Coloring composition, colored radiation-sensitive composition, method of producing dye polymer, ink for inkjet, color filter and method of manufacturing the same, solid imaging device, and display device |
CN104448103A (en) * | 2014-11-25 | 2015-03-25 | 南京工业大学 | fluorescent tracing quadripolymer (FM/AMPS/AA/MA) and synthetic method and application thereof |
JP2015145440A (en) * | 2014-01-31 | 2015-08-13 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter producing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for producing coloring composition |
Family Cites Families (11)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2010174151A (en) * | 2009-01-30 | 2010-08-12 | Fujifilm Corp | Pigment dispersion composition, colored photosensitive composition, color filter, liquid crystal display device, and solid state image sensor |
JP5470058B2 (en) | 2010-01-15 | 2014-04-16 | 凸版印刷株式会社 | Coloring composition for color filter, color filter, method for producing the same, liquid crystal display device including the same, and organic EL display device |
JP5610610B2 (en) * | 2010-01-15 | 2014-10-22 | 日本化薬株式会社 | Azo dye |
JP5679404B2 (en) | 2010-03-05 | 2015-03-04 | 日本化薬株式会社 | Azo dye |
JP5791874B2 (en) * | 2010-03-31 | 2015-10-07 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | COLORING COMPOSITION, INKJET INK, COLOR FILTER AND ITS MANUFACTURING METHOD, SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE, AND DISPLAY DEVICE |
JP2014016376A (en) * | 2010-11-18 | 2014-01-30 | Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd | Color resin composition |
JP2012158649A (en) * | 2011-01-31 | 2012-08-23 | Nippon Kayaku Co Ltd | Novel thiazole-based cationic dye |
JP5934664B2 (en) * | 2012-03-19 | 2016-06-15 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Colored radiation-sensitive composition, colored cured film, color filter, colored pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device |
JP2013218186A (en) * | 2012-04-11 | 2013-10-24 | Japan Carlit Co Ltd:The | Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter using the same |
JP6082705B2 (en) | 2014-01-31 | 2017-02-15 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Coloring composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device |
JP6340871B2 (en) * | 2014-03-31 | 2018-06-13 | 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 | Coloring composition for color filter, and color filter |
-
2016
- 2016-11-01 TW TW105135277A patent/TWI707922B/en active
- 2016-11-11 JP JP2017551852A patent/JP6837988B2/en active Active
- 2016-11-11 KR KR1020187012284A patent/KR102152047B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2016-11-11 WO PCT/JP2016/083490 patent/WO2017086245A1/en active Application Filing
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2012162677A (en) * | 2011-02-08 | 2012-08-30 | Fujifilm Corp | Coloring composition, colored radiation-sensitive composition, method of producing dye polymer, ink for inkjet, color filter and method of manufacturing the same, solid imaging device, and display device |
JP2015145440A (en) * | 2014-01-31 | 2015-08-13 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter producing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for producing coloring composition |
CN104448103A (en) * | 2014-11-25 | 2015-03-25 | 南京工业大学 | fluorescent tracing quadripolymer (FM/AMPS/AA/MA) and synthetic method and application thereof |
Cited By (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2018205533A (en) * | 2017-06-05 | 2018-12-27 | 凸版印刷株式会社 | Photosensitive color composition for color filter for solid-state image sensor, color filter and solid-state image sensor |
WO2020022247A1 (en) * | 2018-07-26 | 2020-01-30 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable composition, production method for curable composition, film, color filter, production method for color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device |
JPWO2020022247A1 (en) * | 2018-07-26 | 2021-08-02 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device |
US11518827B2 (en) | 2018-07-26 | 2022-12-06 | Fujifilm Corporation | Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device |
JP7198819B2 (en) | 2018-07-26 | 2023-01-04 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Curable composition, method for producing curable composition, film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device |
WO2020213700A1 (en) * | 2019-04-19 | 2020-10-22 | 学校法人日本大学 | Simple method for detecting nucleic acid sequence, etc. |
JP7448239B2 (en) | 2019-04-19 | 2024-03-12 | 学校法人日本大学 | Simple detection method for nucleic acid sequences, etc. |
JPWO2020235674A1 (en) * | 2019-05-23 | 2020-11-26 | ||
WO2020235674A1 (en) * | 2019-05-23 | 2020-11-26 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Resin composition, liquid composition, colorant compound, and optical material |
JP7163492B2 (en) | 2019-05-23 | 2022-10-31 | 富士フイルム株式会社 | Resin composition, liquid composition, dye compound and optical material |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
KR102152047B1 (en) | 2020-09-04 |
JPWO2017086245A1 (en) | 2018-08-30 |
JP6837988B2 (en) | 2021-03-03 |
TW201728695A (en) | 2017-08-16 |
TWI707922B (en) | 2020-10-21 |
KR20180064445A (en) | 2018-06-14 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
JP6339208B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6152074B2 (en) | Dye multimer, coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6147134B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6336092B2 (en) | Composition, cured film, pattern forming method, color filter, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6054824B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6082705B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film using the same, color filter, pattern forming method, color filter manufacturing method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6837988B2 (en) | Coloring compositions, color filters, pattern forming methods, solid-state image sensors, image display devices and dye multimers | |
JP2016102191A (en) | Colored composition, cured film, color filter, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state image sensing device, image display device, organic electroluminescence device, pigment, and method for manufacturing pigment | |
WO2014181834A1 (en) | Colored composition, colored cured film, color filter, solid-state image sensor and image display device | |
JP6147133B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, color filter, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6251067B2 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film, method for producing color filter, color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
WO2015098804A1 (en) | Coloring composition, cured film using same, color filter, pattern formation method, method for manufacturing color filter, solid-state imaging element, and image display device | |
JP6691134B2 (en) | Curable composition, optical filter, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state image sensor and image display device | |
JP6574849B2 (en) | Coloring composition, color filter, pattern forming method, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
JP6279745B2 (en) | COLORING COMPOSITION, COLOR FILTER, PATTERN FORMING METHOD, COLOR FILTER MANUFACTURING METHOD, SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE, IMAGE DISPLAY DEVICE, AND DYE MULTIMER MANUFACTURING METHOD | |
WO2016072259A1 (en) | Colored curable composition, color filter, pattern formation method, method for producing color filter, solid-state imaging device, and image display device | |
WO2015115413A1 (en) | Coloring composition, pattern formation method, color filter manufacturing method, color filter, solid-state imaging element, image display device, and method for manufacturing coloring composition |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 16866247 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 20187012284 Country of ref document: KR Kind code of ref document: A |
|
ENP | Entry into the national phase |
Ref document number: 2017551852 Country of ref document: JP Kind code of ref document: A |
|
NENP | Non-entry into the national phase |
Ref country code: DE |
|
122 | Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase |
Ref document number: 16866247 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |